Home
Hard Disk Manager™ 14 Professional
Contents
1. Deive gt drive letter Followed by a colon PathToExternalKeyFile gt external recovery key file that can be used to unlock the derive RecoveryPassuord A recovery password that can be used to unlock the drive Examples nanage bde unlock C rk E RecoveryKey bek nanage bde unlock C RecoveryPassuord 52534I 626783 316217 327426 216348 3 1663556270540 78056 RA Programs Paragon Softuarerprogran gt nanage bde unlock e rk cssrecoverykey b a file c srecoverykey bek successfully unlocked volume E Mir Prograns Paragon Software progran gt h If going to the main launcher of our program now Open Advanced Interface the volume will be correctly detected and become available for operation Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev System Reserved C E Local Disk E 350 MB NTFS IS6GBNTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Local Disk D Unalloc 19 5 GB Not formatted 404GB Troubleshooter Here you can find answers to the most frequently asked questions that might arise while using the program 1 try to run an operation but the program claims my partition is in use and suggests restarting the computer There are a number of operations that cannot be performed while your partition is in use or locked in other words Please agree to reboot your machine to make the program accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode run an ope
2. Gar Convert dynamic hard disk to basic 14 IF the disk has more than four simple volumes the first three of then wall become primary partitions and the rest will be converted to the logical ones The hard disk after convert Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Hew Volume H 119 9 GE NTFS The resulting basic hard disk can have no more than 1 primary partitions Please select how many primary partitions the basic disk should hawe O The program can only process dynamic disks containing solid simple volumes without extension Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 103 Converting GPT to Basic MBR The program allows you to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes into a basic MBR disk while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk into a basic MBR disk you should take the following steps 1 Select a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Convert to Basic MBR Hard 3 Disk Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a GPT disk contains several volumes the prog
3. However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation O It is strongly recommended not to un mount backup images with Windows Disk Manager or other third side software Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a backup image you should take the following steps 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Unmount the Selected Archive O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Defragment MFT The MFT Master File Table is an NTFS system file that contains in depth information on files including size time and date stamps permissions and data contents In the course of time the MFT file can also be fragmented thus slowing down the speed at which data is accessed The program enables to defragment the MFT file In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select an NTFS partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Defragment MFT O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject C
4. 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list 7 Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so far 11 8 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 03 Time to finish 00 00 00 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbf to HDDO Partil arc_0910131315597601 Item 1 of 2 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0300p 000 to HDDO Partl arc_091013131559760 Item 2 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and burn it to CD DVD when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to burn CD DVD discs Copyright 1994 2013
5. A A A Minimum memory size Recommended memory size J Maximum memory size f taken more you could face extensive swapping If the selected version does not officially support the guest OS you will be notified and prompted to select another one 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Connecting a virtual disk Connect VD You ve got the option to connect a virtual disk of one of the supported types directly to our program as if it s an ordinary physical disk so opening up enormous possibilities e Exchange data between your physical environment and the virtual one through Volume Explorer data import only or File Transfer Wizard data import and export The way we offer is much easier and faster as you don t need a VM shared folder the network or the slow goer drag and drop e Import data from a parent virtual disk to one of its snapshots e Accomplish drive partitioning create format delete move resize etc e Modify partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Volume Label etc e Clone a partition or an entire hard disk e Edit View sectors and many more Direct connection 1 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Connect a Virtual Disk 2 Inthe opened dialog click on the Local VD tab then browse for the required virtual disk You can connect a virtual disk from a local disk a flash stick a mapped network share or CD DVD BD When selecting
6. E o Local Disk 499 9 GE NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der o Unallocated 749 8 GB 4 On the Wipe Mode page select the wipe out all the data to irreversible destroy all on disk information Choose this option if you want to destroy completely all the data on the selected object f Clear wipe free space Choose this option if you want to destroy the traces of data that may have been left after an ordinary delete operation 5 On the Wipe Method page select a specific data erasure algorithm or choose to create a customized one in our case we prefer to use a certified military standard US DoD 5220 22 M Tou can see the algonthm description and set the level of verification on the next page f Create pour own Data Sanitization method Tou can create your own Data Sanitization method Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 259 O The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product 6 The next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Wipe method US DoD 5220 22 M Ovenante all addressable locations with a character its complement then a random character and verify Erase passes count 3 Very p
7. arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM arc 101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM f FerfLogs 6 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Program Files 1079 2013 5 50 43 AM Program Files x86 10 9 2013 11 01 16 Pe ProgramData 10942013 11 01 18 PM E Je System Volume Information 1049 2073 6 17 05 AM 3 ta Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM E y Administrator 107972013 10 26 37 PM E Lo Default 842242013 12 11 25 PM AppData 8 22 2013 8 36 30 AM m de ae 6 22 2011 3 8 36 30 AM Hi 842242013 7 45 52 AM al mE Downloads 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM f Favorites 8422 2013 8 36 30 AM Lo Links 842242073 8 36 30 AM Music 8422 2073 8 36 30 AM f Pictures 8 22 2013 8 36 304M 5 On the Backup Destination page select a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned disk as a backup destination Look im E Local Disk EJ e UR Y PTE Date e El Local Disk C Je arc 091013125156058 107972013 11 17 27 PM de arc 091013131559760 104942013 11 22 08 PM de arc_0910131 33756622 104942013 6 38 02 AM de arc 091013140817551 104942013 11 08 51 PM de arc 091013140825801 104942013 7 08 29 AM de arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM de arc 101013061 434390 1092013 11 14 51 PM de arc 1010130623903344 1092013 11 53 11 PM de arc 101013091536750 10102073 2 15 43 AM de arc 101013091 716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 4M de Perflogs 822 2013 8 22 35 AM de Program Files 104942013 5 50 4
8. g Local Disk 40 GB NTFS l Jem SCSI LS Logic oe Create a split disk 7 Pre allocate all disk space Current size is 40567 MB 17 8 GB l l 2000 GB J Resize partitions proportionally O The maximum limit you can downsize the virtual disk is the capacity of its first partition 8 Specify a file name for the virtual machine and its location By default the wizard scans all your local disks for available free space and picks the most appropriate location taking into account the total capacity of all virtual disks inside the virtual machine Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 248 Full path to the folder with a virtual machine folder will be created if doesnt exist C My virtual disks Browse an All virtual disks will take approx 2 5 MB on C My virtual disks After the operation is over there will still be 12 6 GB of free space on the selected disk Help me to find an appropriate place for my virtual machine 9 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Creating an empty virtual disk Create VD To create an empty virtual disk please do the following 1 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create Virtual Disk 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select Create an empty virtual disk ES Create an empty virtual disk a Make a new clear virtual image Convert physical disk to virtual d
9. larc 0910131 33756622 phi SFB RB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM x Files of type Archive files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Marne Local Disk Comment No comment is available Volume label Ho label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used space 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File Yl Backup Storagearc_0910137 33 566224arc 0910131 3375662 phi O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Archive Content Loc al Disk Primary MTFS 10 9 GB 39 MB Archive Details Mame Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used space 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 155 O Advanced backup settings are unavailable for sector based increments due to the usage of the new image container pVHD 5 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen 6 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental update to the selected pVHD backup image placed next to the base image This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery med
10. 224 7 GB NTFS 274 9 GB NTFS O Capacity of the volume C 12 224 7 GB The wizard can expand this volume up to 499 5 GB at the expence of other volumes How will the wizard expand the volume e Partition to donate Choose any partition s not only adjacent to donate free space Select volumes to take space from Free space from that volume will be used to enlarge the volume pou have selected on the previous page Wolurnie File system Type Capacity Used pace Free space Free O There iz no unallocated space on the hard disk you have selected The wizard can only expand the volume C at the espence of some other volumes Please click the check box next to any volume to take free space from it Partition size By default the program leaves 50 of the unused space on a partition and removes another 50 to add it to the target partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider or by manually entering the exact value Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 91 Your disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der i 1325 GB NT Select new size 370 818 MB 230 114 MB 511 522 66 MB ON Current volume size 362 1 GB The volume size has been increased on 137 4 GB Result After the operation is completed free space of the specified partition will be increased by up taking the on disk unallocated sp
11. Available location for backup images Backup to local mounted partitions Backup to local unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Backup to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence Backup to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system Backup to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure Backup to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Backup to an FTP SFTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 11 Bootable Backup Capsule to get the choice to launch the Linux or PTS DOS recovery environment every time you start up the computer With its help you will be able to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes For PBF images Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and data with the minimal efforts possible With a unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user
12. Clear wipe free space Select the option to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data O The Clear Free Space operation is available only for Logical and Primary partitions of known file systems Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 107 e Wipe method Here you can select a specific data erasure algorithm or create a customized method by marking the appropriate option US DoD 5220 22 M Tou can see the algonthm description and set the level of verfication on the next page f Create your own Data Sanitization method Tou can create your own Data Sanitization method In case you preferred to use a specific algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Wipe method US DoD 5220 22 M Overnvrite all addressable locations with a character its complement then a random character and verify Erase passes count 3 Very passes count 1 Percentage of sectors to check 100 Approximate wipe tine 00 21 19 You can skip verfying completely or partly by disabling it or reducing percentage of sectors to check Please note it would be a deviation from US DoD 5220_22 M O The list of supported military and
13. Fartitionl Inactive O0O8 2 Boot Man1889 B6B AB 182419 HE free Partition PAI TA H 19659 HE 9 So if everything is OK you ve got to have by this moment Windows XP successfully installed Your Windows Vista however is still non bootable To fix this issue you need to launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard To do that please install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager O To avoid double installation please use our recovery media to activate Boot Manager Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 221 10 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 11 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR Boot menu options o Normal mode Y Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds Hidden mode Time to display the Boot Manager startup message hoose a hot key for stanup B nage 12 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Traditional way O This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence 1 Inthe main window select your hard disk on the Disk Map to make a block of free space on it 2 Release some free space not less than 10 GB to install Windows XP from
14. File system NTFS Used space 10 5 GB File radare 091013125156058 pbt Hame Comment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Size 1 1 GE 20 9 ME 110 3 KE 215 8 KE 29 2 ME 1 1 GE 110 3 KE 5 7 ME Total size 499 6 GB Free space 489 1 GB To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set Date 10104201 3 6 55 53 PM 10104201 3 6 55 52 PM 10104201 3 6 55 54 PM 10104201 3 6 55 54 PM 10710 2013 6 55 56 PM 10710 2013 6 55 57 PM 10710 2013 9 35 56 PM 10710 2013 9 35 57 PM 101042013 9 35 56 PM 10710 2013 9 33 49 PM 10710 2013 9 33 49 PM 10710 2013 9 35 56 PM 200 5 On the next page specify what you need to extract from the backup by marking checkboxes next to the required data items At the right lower corner of the window you can see the resulted amount of the selected data Olick the check box next to any file or folder you want to restore from Name ane Local Disk E Partition 499 6 GB Lpg E Recycle Bin a E arc 111013105844785 Po Documents and Settings E Image Storage A PerfLogs ES Program Files EX ProgramData ES System Volume Information E Windows Mi autoexec bat File 24 Bytes bootmgr File 417 6 KB BOOTNXT File 1 Bytes checkvendor mst File 20 KB 3 config sys File 10 Bytes pagefile sys File 1 GB PAT_Dell_GUI_E
15. Free space before 0 224719 MB y 20m Free space after 0 224219 MB o p 118570 lo MB 7 Now you ve got a block of free space to add to your data partition Basic Hard Disk O VMware Virtual 500 GB E NTFS pe NTFS New Volume 8 Choose the data partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 9 Move the slider to the right to increase size of the partition Click OK to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 217 Partition preview D NTFS New Volume Mew size 96 335358 MB 335358 MB Free space before 0 335262 MB Free space after 0 335262 MB D MB 10 Apply the pending changes 1 pending operations Apply changes Undo last ndo las gt Undo all Apply b You have 1 pending operations P 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Move partition Operation progress Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 15 Time to finish 00 00 00 Restart enabled gt Moving volume Scan volume Performance test Restart enabled Copy data by cluster Restart disabled Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Let s assume you re a Boot Camp user who s got Windows XP as the second operating system Initially allocated space
16. LC oo Number of attempts to start W55 3 Timeout between attempts in seconda 120 Change run during backup options In this section you may configure the hot processing mode e Enable hot processing Mark the checkbox to enable the so called hot data processing mode that is specially designed to process data without restarting your operating system e Hot processing technology From the pull down list you can select the required hot processing technology e Always use hot processing Select the option to process partitions without making them locked Thus you will be able to keep working with them as usual e Use hot processing only when partition is locked Select the option to use the hot processing only when partitions are locked and cannot be processed without restarting the computer Please keep in mind that once you start any operation on a partition in this mode it will automatically be locked by the program thus you won t be able to keep working with it as usual e Hot processing temporary drive Here you can select a disk drive that will be used to store the temporary hot backup data by default C e Attempts to start VSS Here you can set how many attempts to start Microsoft VSS the program is to do before automatically rebooting the system and accomplishing the operation in a special boot up mode e Timeout between attempts in seconds Here you can set a time period between different attempts to start Mi
17. Restore defaults This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when the Send e mail notification on apply function is enabled By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite the required operation you can choose whether to receive an e mail notification on its completion or not O You won t be notified if an operation requires the system restart Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 54 Virtual Mode Options e Virtual mode options Operations mode le Allow virtual mode Set this option on to carry out all the operations virtually ou will be able to commit the changes or rollback all of them or the last one IF you switch thi option off the operations Will be cared out immediately Close progress dialog automatically Set this option on to automatically close the progress dialog after committing the changes In this section you may configure the virtual mode e Allow virtual mode Mark the checkbox to enable the virtual mode It is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operation will be executed until confirmation thus giving you a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation We strongly recommend you to enable this mode e Close progress dialog automatically Mark the checkbox to automatically close the progress dialog after accomplishing operations File System Conversion Options e Virtual mode options
18. The Copy Hard Disk Wizard is a traditional like wizard By going through its steps you configure all the necessary settings to launch the copy operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need You need at least two hard disks to carry out this operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 74 Startup e Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Hard Disk There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy hard disk operation e The hard disk to copy Select a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk will be copied to the destination pon will choose on the next page Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i y Local Disk C 499 6 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p y DA A Utils G 75 114 4GB 310 5 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey if Use exclude masks Dont estimate si
19. Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 32GB Free space 445 6 GB File C farc_ 101017 3062903344arc_10101 3062903344 pbf O Bytes 11 13 KB 24 120 GE 4 120 GE F 71 9 MB 24 KB 30 711 9 MB B 711 9 MB 14 2 GB 14 2 GE 2 477 7 GB 2 24 KB 3 589 5 KB of To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 184 Look in E Local Disk C ER F Mame Size Date S PP p Jac OST0TS125756069 pbf 5 166 10 9 2073 6 00 28 4M arc 091013125156058 ph 28 9 MB 10 9 2013 6 00 23 4M 2 arc 0910131251 56058 ptm 1103 B 10 9 2013 6 00 27 4M di arc 091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM Je arc 09101371 33756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM di arc 091013140817551 10 10 2013 7 17 43 AM de arc_09101 3140825801 100102013 18 23 AM di arc 10101 3053219496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM m arc 101013061 434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM di arc 10101 3062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM de arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15
20. e ENE VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350 MB E Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 750 GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes ke Master Boot Record MER 0 e 1 The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 5 Onthe Backup Destination page select the Save data to local network drives option There are several ways the Wizard can store pour data Please select how would pon like to save the archive C Save data to the Backup Capsule f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CO DVD or BD Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 135 6 Map a network disk to place your backup image to Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location L o4a 000013024 000 sal yo A Name Size Date EN My Computer Remote location mapping aa Local Dis A network share a Ef Network Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection ren Cli
21. e Uplifted Recovery Media Builder Paragon s Recovery Media Builder a simple alternative to Boot Media Builder can help you prepare either Linux or WinPE based bootable environment on a USB thumb drive or in an ISO file previously only creation of WinPE images on USB was supported Unlike Boot Media Builder it doesn t require to have Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit ADK or Automated Installation Kit WAIK installed in the system However it can only be used under Windows 7 or higher and its functionality is rather limited e Complete support of Windows Storage Spaces Windows 8 has come with a storage management feature called the storage spaces It enables to easily manage large storage pools In fact it s an expandable virtual container of defined data size allowing users to add it as many physical drives as they want until the defined virtual disk s limit is reached This makes it easy to include additional storage devices without having to set up and manage each attached physical storage drive e Uplifted Linux Recovery Environment Started from HDM 14 the Linux based recovery environment is based on SuSe 12 3 more hardware devices supported and includes P2P Adjust OS Wizard to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P UEFI fixup to clone restore migrate 64 bit Windows systems configured to the uEFI boot mode ConnectVD to connect a virtual disk as if it were an ordin
22. lt j Partitioning Options Confirmations W Ask for volume label before partition delete Ask confirmation when converting FATT6 to FAT 32 This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during partitioning operations e Request confirmation before partition deletion Mark the checkbox to activate an additional security mechanism Thus when going to delete a partition you will be automatically requested to enter its label e Request confirmation when converting FAT16 to FAT32 Mark the checkbox to automatically request confirmation before converting FAT16 to FAT32 There are a number of situations when this kind of conversion is the only way out to accomplish the operation For instance you are going to migrate your system to a larger hard disk with the proportional resize of existing partitions what is very convenient As a result you can get original FAT16 partitions go beyond the 4GB limit Thus without conversion to FAT32 this operation will in no way be possible to accomplish The same goes for any copy hard disk partition or restore hard disk partition operation involving an extra upsizing E Mail Options PA E mail options Specify pour e mail account options Outgoing mail server SMTP User e mail address SMTP port number 0 Mp outgoing server requires authentication User name Password Send test e mail Click this button to test e mail account options The program will send ge
23. 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 131 6 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to the Backup Capsule option There are several ways the Wizard can store pour data Please select how would you like to save the archive f Save data to local network drives f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name larc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space O available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space delete outdated backups from the Backup Capsule or resize it with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No commen 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary
24. 3 ta lis NTUSER DA T43197985f 0b5d 11 512 KB 9 3 2013 11 09 36 AM ta A MTUSER DA T43197985f 0b5d 11 512 KB 9 3 2013 11 09 36 AM fae se ntuser ini 20 Bytes 9 3 2013 11 08 02 4M te W All Users O Bytes x 9 Ifa success you ll see a note that everything s ready to start the migration 10 Since we re going to use our SSD drive exclusively for Windows OS we additionally mark the appropriate option to let the wizard expand the resulted partition across all on disk space A all available space For the partition with 05 Use this option to expand the partition with 5 so it will use all available space on the disk This option is recommended if you are mot going to create other partitions on the hard disk you re migrating to Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 229 11 The selected source 64 bit Windows 8 is configured to the uEFI boot mode so if we want to start up Windows from the target SSD we need to additionally mark the appropriate option Please note however the source disk will become unbootable after the migration is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector A new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive O The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process
25. 32 pVHD Support Paragon introduces a pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive format a special VHD optimized for storing backups of virtual and physical machines It s very efficient in handling incremental chains data de duplication and synchronization pVHD allows obtaining backups that are up to four times smaller than original backup objects In the current version of the product backup images can be made either in the old PBF or the new pVHD Please note that the pVHD support has a promotional goal In future releases pVHD will gradually take the primary role Below is the list of wizards that allow working with pVHD e Backup to VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e Incremental Backup to VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e Restore from VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE What you get by using pVHD e Incremental imaging works much faster and rock stable in comparison with the old PBF e Only pVHD images can be used to do immediate virtualization e With the new backup technology available for customers as a new backup image format pVHD Paragon has also achieved easy support of any virtual containers VMDK VHD etc Dynamic Disks As you probably know MS DOS Microsoft Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Server 2003 2008 support four primary partitions per physical hard disk one of which can be extended Certainly there is the possibility to create logical drives within the extended partition Such types of disks are called basic W
26. 349 443 MB Please select file system for new partition NTFS Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specify deve letter Fo ml E Mere ten 6 Define parameters of the future partition By all means it has to be primary and since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue eas Ren pan oe Primary patton Please specify new parttion size 349451 gt 7MB 349 451 MB Please specty size of free space before the parttion O A OMB 349 437 MB Please specty size of free space after the partition 0 Al OMB 249 443 MB Please select file system for new partition NTFS A Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specty drive letter F sw ad Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 223 O The Create Partition dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 7 Asaresult of the operation we have got a newly created FAT32 partition just enough in size to comfortably work with Windows XP Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Vista C New Volume F 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2GB NTFS 8 Hide the Windows Vista partition to avoid writing any data on it during the Windows XP installation as it is the best way to provide system independence To do that please call the context menu for it right cli
27. B o data 4 256 1 GB NTFS 243 5 GE NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l E y Unallocated 115 5 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E o Local Disk 749 9 GB NTFS y 1 As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set the following partition parameters Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 2 43 GE NTFS Partition type Volume label New Volume Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 85 In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page When it is marked the next page enables to define Ww Us
28. Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Reboot Restart the computer e Power off Shut down the computer While working with the recovery environment you might experience some inconvenience caused by possible video artifacts It is just a result of changing video modes and in no way will affect the program functionality If this is the case please wait a bit and everything will be OK Normal Mode When the Normal mode is selected the Linux launch menu appears You can copy an entire hard disk or ts partitions to new locations You can also save them as image files for later restoration Please select the drive its partition if necessary and then activate the Hard Disk or Partition pull down menu and select the operation needed Simple Restore Wizard Disk Copy Wizard Undelete Partition Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD e Hard Disk Manager enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 22 e Simple Restore Wizard allows restoring hard disks and partitions e Disk Copy
29. By default the program offers an easy to understand folder name which can be customized however Please note that itis possible to select only FAT FAT S2 of NTFS adjacent partitions or FAT FATS of NTFS partitions separated from each other by free block You will not be able to proceed further if no pair of partitions of these types are presented on the disk Select left partition from a pair you would like to merge Aight partition will be selected automatically Please note that content of right partition will be placed within a folder placed in a root of left partition ou can specify this folder name in a field below Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der E System E Data E K Utils G 1 GE NTFS 26GB NTFS 3 2 GE NTFS Specity a folder name to keep content of right partition Folder Hame Imerged_partition_content To review the changes click Next 1 If a system partition is the right one of the selected pair Windows OS will become unbootable after the merge operation is over 7 Review the changes and complete the wizard 8 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 9 If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your
30. Click the Next button to start the backup process O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then burn the resulted image to CD DVD please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition PPE EEE CELLU Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 Onthe next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition pon want to back
31. Correct partition boot record Partition targeted Hard disk O Partition O Status Successful Date and Time 2013 Oct 10 Thd 15 27 52 your computer he program Operation 2 Change drive letters Partition targeted Hard disk O Partition O Info System Root folder is WINDOWS Status Successful Date and Time 2013 Oct 10 Thd 15 28 39 Save 13 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 14 Reboot the computer Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got the bootable backup capsule containing a backup of your hard disk That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your hard disk from a backup image contained in the backup capsule when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the bootable backup capsule By default the program offers to use the F1 hot key to boot from it O This scenario implies that the backup capsule is bootable 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard
32. Disk O File Transter Wizard Boot Corrector Password Cleaner e Type ree Volume lak rd Disk O Siz Registry editor Primary Network Configurator 33 1 MBE System Ri Primary Install Windows OS utility 39GB No label 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to back up page select your Mac hard disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 142 Basic Hard Disk O Model YMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Lis ed Free Wolume label Active Hidden Basic Hard Disk O Size 500 GB h O Primary NTFS 350 MB 257 MB 93 1 MBE System Resen Yes Yes a Primary NTFS 500 GB 60 5 GE 439 GB Mo label Mo Mo 8 Onthe Backup Destination page select the Save data to any local drive or a network share option Please select how would you like to save the archive 8 Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to _ Burn data to CDIDVD BD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 Select an external USB drive as a backup destination Look in NTFS 0 on Disk 1 UFSD disk 5 arc_091013125156058 3 Documents and Settings C Perf
33. E 2193 GB NTFS 2 Call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Make Partition Primary dialog Backup Capst 219 3 GB Disk Dev Disk Dev New Volume F 292 5 GE NTFS Disk Dev uu Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CO OVO or BD Copy Partition Restore Partition Adjust 05 Format Partition Delete Partition Mowe Resize Partition Convert File Syster Defragment Partition Defragment MFT Compact MFT Change Volume Label Rernowe Drive Letter Hide Partition Make Partition Primary 3 Confirm the operation by clicking the Yes button By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you can either confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them or continue work in the virtual mode GP Are you sure you want ta make the partition primary Tou are about to make the partition F New Yolume NTFS primar 4 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Merge Partitions any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 5 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to merge as the right one will be selected automatically During the operation all contents of the right partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 214 joined partition
34. G2 Primary NTFS C 499 6 GB E tRecycle Bin 9 3 2013 1 49 11 PM E Documents and Settings Dzar 2013 6 45 52 AM ES PerfLogs 6 22 2019 2235 4M E Prograrn Files 10222073 4 01 15 AM E Program Files 86 932013 1 54 48 FM ps 10 22 2013 7 00 32 AM ES System Volume Information Export 1042222013 4 00 53 AM E Users Refresh 9 3 2013 1 48 22 PM E Windows 9 3 2013 9 43 00 AM boomer H76KB 8 21 2073 9 31 45 PM BOOTH T 1 Bytes 64182073 4 18 29 AM pagetile sys 11GB 10 22 2013 3 37 45 AM sapiile sys 256 MB 1022013 3 37 46 4M 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB E 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 750 GB GE 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 120 GB LN Virtual Drives Call a context menu for the selected file folder by the right mouse click to export it to some other location local or network drive etc Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 116 Look in E Local Disk C ER p a Address ce Disk Drives casi Se El Local Disk C Za iI di PertLogs araar ADi 12 50 47 AM i di Program Files 10 14 2013 10 46 56 PM Network Places Et fi Users 9 3 2013 3 24 45 PM oe Jl windows 9 3 2013 10 55 03 AM l E DD Drive D w E NEW VOLUME E Ea F New Volume F Available operation scenarios e Restoring separate files and folders from a backu The current version of the program does not enable to access pVHD images
35. However please take into consideration one more step you need to accomplish if you decide to use the traditional scenario 1 Besides hiding of the system partition before installation of the second OS you need to make it inactive as well To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the corresponding dialog Click the Yes button to continue Are pou sure you want to sel the volume az inactive You ate about to set the volume WinkP NTFS a mactrve You compute may no longer boot correctly tT ee dls 4 184 8 GB NTFS E NTFS M rara E Faris Linus Ext 2 Lira Ext3 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 225 Reviving the system partition In case you are not able or not willing to complete the mentioned above scenarios but have already reached the point when all changes are applied and everything is ready to install the second OS please do the following to make your system bootable once again only relevant for the traditional scenario 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here O www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2
36. O primary or as the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems 4 Activate the bootable recovery environment if needed With its help you will get the choice to boot directly from the backup capsule for maintenance or recovery purposes every time you start up the computer If you re attempting to embed our bootable environment to a GPT disk just our case you will be prompted to provide a path to an ISO image of the WinPE recovery environment which can be prepared either with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder available in the My Account section www paragon software com my account If you have to do with an MBR disk no preliminary actions are required as in this case there will be used a Linux based image which is included to the product by default le Allow to start recovery system from backup capsule Bootable backup capsule on selected GPT hard disk can be based on WinPE ACD only Please buid WinPE ACD 150 file either with the Boot Media Builder add on or Recover Media Builder add on supplied with your product and specify its location C AUsers Administrator s Desktop dest iso Browse Time to display the backup capsule startup message 5 seconds Startup message preview Paragon Backup Capsule f Do not allow to start recovery sys
37. Restoring Hard Disk Y All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation four hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der j l j fi Unallocated 471 4 GB Hard Disk Restore Options Copp data and resize partitions proportionally In this mode the Wizard changes the size of partitions in the same proportion with keeping intact their relative order This option can be useful in restoring an image of hard disk to a larger one Perform surface test Set this option if you want the Wizard to perform the surface test on the target hard disk In this case if the program finds bad and unreliable sectors it will mark them as unusable ones e Copy data and resize partitions proportionally If this option is activated the program proportionally changes the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when restoring to a larger hard disk e Perform surface test Define whether the surface test will be accomplished during the operation or not e Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Copyright 1
38. So how this tragedy can be prevented File Backup versus Sector Backup Since the advent of the computer age people were in the search of ways to guarantee data safety As a result we ve got now two principal approaches the file based backup and the sector based backup The main difference between the two lies in the way data is treated Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 25 A sector based backup operates with an image or a snapshot of the whole disk system or its separate partitions It not only includes the contents of all user made files but additionally contains the exact structure of directories information about file allocation file attributes and other related data Thus it enables to successfully process system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain In contrast a file based backup takes into account a file system structure and only functions on a file or folder level So it is very efficient when archiving separate files or folders but in no way will help you back up a system partition You should understand pretty well that each of the two approaches is only good when properly chosen In the comparison table below you can see when this or that approach will suit you at most Sector Based Backup File Based Backup Merits It does not dependent on a particular file system Functioning on a file folder level it is ideal for Thus it can su
39. computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that you have the merged volume now Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Let s assume you ve got two partitions on your hard disk the first one takes about 40 of all the disk space and is exclusively used for Vista 64 bit while the second servers as a data storage One day you realize that your system partition doesn t need so much disk space that s what your data partition really requires at the moment You can easily tackle this problem with Paragon Linux DOS recovery environment To increase size of a data partition by taking unused space from a system partition please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 215 Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here www paragon software com my accou nt To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal
40. currently only NTFS and FAT file systems are available for splitting To detach OS from media files please do the following i Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Split Partition Wizard The first page of the wizard informs the user on the upcoming operation Please read all notes carefully before you proceed Once you re done with that click Next to continue Select a volume you want to split up Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev If the wizard cannot work with the selected partition you ll get a corresponding O notification click on the More Info link to see the details Split operation cant be performed over this partition More UN 4 When selecting a system partition just our case the wizard notifies that this type of operation may cause inability of the operating system to start up if moving system files folders to the new partition So please take it seriously If you re sure confirm the operation ATTENTION You are trying to split systern partition Make sure not to split system toldersfiles otherwise system will not be able to boot anymore Would you like to continue 5 Mark checkboxes next to files folders you d like to move to the new partition Please don t touch system yy dl files folders like Windows Users Program Files config sys etc By clicking the Next button the wizard starts calculating
41. f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive details Archive name larc_1 01013091945891 Estimated archive size 45 7 GB Space available on backup destination 417 2 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No comment 8 On the Synthesis Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive a new full partition archive It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard O This function is currently unavailable for modification of entire hard disk backups This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Recovery Scenarios Correcting EFl parameters To specify a bootable device in the EFl boot entry please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can O get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIO
42. ou can return to the coresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to transfer Object s selected 1 Total data size 1 GB 1 078 198 272 Bytes Transter destination Destination path ES Space available on destination 485 9 GB 521 742 041 008 Bytes Overwrite existing files No Result After the operation is completed the required data will be placed into the specified destination Available operation scenarios e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Mount Partition The program enables to assign or remove drive letters of existing formatted partitions Assign Drive Letter In order to mount a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Assign Drive Letter There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected partition Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Gar Assign a drive letter as This allows access to the volume by using the drive
43. please insert the first one 2 Restart the computer 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 4 Inthe PTS DOS launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in Linux as well 5 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 174 6 Onthe What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Please select the filewith partition or hard disk image You can select image from list below on Double click Created on Type Archive path 2013 Oct14 11 48 28 Partition imedia CD1 linux 1 Select Image imedia CDL linus LMG D1 PBF 7 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image b
44. the partition will automatically be converted to FAT32 The program enables to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work providing 100 percent guarantee that your data is kept intact 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other e Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Converting File System With our program you can change type of the used file system without destroying its data While performing the operation it first checks the current file system for consistency and then verifies whether the on partition data meet the Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 97 requirements of the desired file system or not After having passed the testing the program re organizes the file system metadata and user files The program enables to convert the following file system types FAT16 32 lt gt NTFS NTFS lt gt HFS In order to convert a file system you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Convert file system There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Initially the program suggests so
45. the user can get the system back on track in minutes No additional configuration is required what is very convenient The second possible application is the upgrade of a hard disk to a new one The capacity of a modern hard drive doubles every two years thus opening up new possibilities for software developers As a result programs become more complicated and require considerable amount of free space One day the user realizes that there is no more free space left on the hard disk and the only way out is to upgrade Usually that means that besides purchasing a new hard disk the user is to face a large re installation procedure spanning several days of tedious work But all of this can be avoided just by copying the contents of the old hard disk to a new one proportionally resizing the partitions And the last but not least is the copying of hard disks for cloning purposes It may be of great use when setting up similar computers There is no need for a system administrator to install an operating system from scratch on every one of them It is enough just to configure one and then clone it to the others Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 35 Drive Partitioning As you probably know a hard drive is to be split into one or more partitions since it cannot hold data until it is carved up and space is set aside for an operating system Until recently most PCs used to have just one partition which filled the entire h
46. 1 VMware Mware Virtual 5 SCSI Di A Restore Partition Unallocated Format Partition 499 9 GB Delete Partition Mlowe Resize Partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI D Unallocated 749 9 GB Assign Orrve Letter Hide Partition Make Partition Pri Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI D AR A Change serial Number a Unallocated Chanana Pista 15 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right by the drag and drop technique While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 207 Gar Are you sure you want to move resize volume 17 You are about to moveresize Linux Ext4 volume New Yolume 7 Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Unallo ed New Volume 170 2 GB Linus Ext Volume size 174 285 MB 4 v 23 992 MB 239 925 MB Free space before 65 640 ME O bytes 215 932 MB Free space after 0 Bytes O bytes 215 932 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but will require more time es 4 Now you ve got a block of free s
47. 10 9 GB Used space 9 7 GB Free space 1 2 GB File Yl Backup Storage ditt 101013084041 587 pot To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the Synthesis Settings page you can additionally modify any property of the selected backup image if necessary To accomplish our task we have no need to change anything at all ackun image optiona Z PAE Ate cael E Backup image options Password protection CO DYDED recording option W Control archive integrity Choose this option to allow writing of specific data that Will later be used during restore to check the archive Integrity Ik can slow down the backup operation W Set image file names automatically Choose this option to automatically name files in complex archive Compression level Normal compression Good compression Provides average speed with the reasonable image size Image split Enable image splitting Choose this option to enable splitting the archive to several files Maximum split size 2000 ME 4 el 5 On the Synthetic Archive Destination page select where you want to place the resulted backup image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 165 There are several ways the Wizard can store pour data Please select how you would like to save the archive f Save data to local network drives f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations
48. 1092013 08 20 AM Local Disk 9 MB 30 8 KB 1 109 07 3 6 38 00 AM New Yolume E 10 5 GB 47 MB a 1 10 9 2013 6 16 13 AM Local Disk E 477 GB ayes GEB E E 1 1092013 5 52 57 AM Local Disk C 499 6 GB 5 1 GB Me 1 gt l Switch to File wiew Archive File Details Mame Local Disk C Comment No comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 15 9 GB Free space 467 7 GB File E 4arc_091013131559760 arc_091013131559760 pfi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Please note that only sector based images of the new type with a pfi index file are available to work with Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 154 Look in E pool Mserver2 12 ml 3 T H E Local Disk C H E DWD Drive D E rE pool server Pr H di Audio 46 2013 4 25 25 4M I mi 4 16 2013 12 29 46 4M Er i IBackup Storage 10 10 2013 12 52 24 4M SS arc 09101371 25156058 10102013 12 51 36 AM gt dl arc 0910131 3375662 10 10 2073 12 52 27 AM
49. 12 Click Copy to initiate the migration process When the operation is over first check up Windows OS starts up from the target SSD If yes delete the Windows OS partition from the source disk then re partition the disk according to your needs Migrating system to a new HDD up to 2 2TB in size Let s assume that you ve bought a new hard disk that is up to 2 2TB in capacity It s faster and of much higher capacity than your current system disk so it s quite natural you start thinking about system migration We can help you do that To migrate your system to a hard disk that doesn t exceed the 2 2TB capacity limit please do the following 1 Connect both source and destination disks to the computer 2 Turn on the computer 3 Click the Copy Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Hard Disk There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Select Hard Disk to Copy page select a source disk a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk Will be copied to the destination pon will choose on the next page Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Local Disk C 499 65 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der Eh Unallocat
50. 5 SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Dris m 5 Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VHD image Virtual Image Virtual Hard Disk Drive E Local Disk Primary 4 Specify the guest OS and a virtualization software vendor If your system hosts several Windows OSes our wizard will find them all and automatically patch to run in a virtual environment However we cannot guarantee smooth startup of all found Windows systems for their configuration parameters may be incompatible with each other This is why we additionally prompt you to specify what operating system you d like to use as guest to configure the virtual machine for that particular system Specifying Virtualization Software Vendor Page The following OS will be used as quest Ey Windows 8 x64 Edition Please select a virtual software vendor le VMware Workstation VMware Fusion f Microsoft Virtual PC f Oracle VirtualBox O Not all vendors may be available to choose If capacity of one of the selected objects exceeds the maximum virtual disk capacity of any vendor this vendor will be shadowed 5 Set properties of the future virtual machine e Virtual machine version Please make sure you choose a version which is supported by your virtualization software otherwise you won t be able to work with the newly created machine e Virtual machine name By default the wizard picks the name of your guest OS which can be modified however e CPU number If your computer supports multiproc
51. Complement page select whether you want to restore both the partition archive and the desired file increment or just the file increment In our case we choose the first option You have selected file complement to a volume arhchive This archive can be restored together with the volume or you can only restore the files saved in the file archive f Restore only files A Note if you choose to restore archive together with a volume all data on the target volume wall be lost The contents of the volume Will be completely replaced from archive 5 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition Its content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E Local Disk C i Unallocated 200 5 GE NTFS 219 3 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i o Local Disk F 499 6 GB NTFS 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 192 6 On the Restore Results page you can see the resu
52. Delet Wipe partition Clear iee space Convert Set label Resize Move el labe UWinaurt Change cluster sire 6 You will be notified after the operations are completed 7 Restart the computer System Migration Scenarios Migrating Windows OS to a solid state drive Migrate OS to SSD The latest SSDs do not boast high capacity but rather smaller size and faster processing speeds over regular hard drives Plus they are completely indifferent to mechanical impact a feature crucial for mobile computers These benefits are leading more and more users to consider migrating at least OS to SSDs to get the most out of their systems So how do you migrate a Windows OS and hundreds of gigabytes of data on one huge volume to an SSD drive of 80 128GB Our Migrate OS to SSD Wizard can help you do that with minimal effort To migrate any Windows OS since XP from a regular hard disk to a fast SSD please do the following Connect an SSD drive to the computer Turn on the computer Click the Copy Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Migrate OS E e N IS The first page of the wizard informs the user on the upcoming operation Please read all notes carefully before you proceed To get additional information on the subject click the Learn more about migrating OS link at the bottom of the window highly recommended Once you re done with that click Next to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software
53. Delete filter Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Filter Browse Description O You can use wildcards and Y to specify the mask cred e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 6 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 158 Exclude masks manage files and folders that will be excluded from archive Specht exclude masks T Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter mel Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter 31 Auxiliary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete
54. Dev l j p Y Eh Unallocated 91 4 300 GE To help you get a clear cut picture of the operation outcome the program allows inspecting the resulted disk layout Restoring Partition e Size of the restored volume and free space before and after it on the disk Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 14607 167 MB 767990 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 753383 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 7533834 OMB 753383 MB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 72 e Drive letter assignment after restore The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the restored partition Partition Restore Options Assign the following drive letter E e Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Cr new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive O The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process
55. Evert Viewer other Stuff E Partition gs Shared Folders second HOD F Partition y Local Users and Groups Dsystem C Partition Healthy System 29 58 GB Performance Logs and Alert 2 Device Manager Storage Removable Storage disk 0 Basic Second HDD F 298 09 GB NTFS Healthy 746 51 GS Unallocated AA EEE As System C Applications D Other Stuff E 29 58 GB NTFS 53 43 GB NTFS 66 03 GB NTFS Healthy System Healthy Heakhy E Unallocated E Primary partition 3 2 S a Services and Applications SETE f 2 First we need to add support for GPT disks to the operating system To do that install Paragon GPT Loader It s included to the product s installation package but it s not allowed to install by default so please take it into account Click on an icon in the list below to change how a feature is installed Feature Description Install GPT Loader dr E This feature requires 152KB on your hard drive Windows OSes since Vista do not need functionality of Paragon GPT Loader so it s only available to install under Windows XP 32 64 bit 3 Restart the system when the installation is over 4 If you launch Windows Disk Management WDM now it will show the same 750GB since the hard disk is still treated as MBR in the operating system If you launch our program you will see that the entire disk space is now correctly detected Being MBR though there
56. File leyel Archive E 10714 2013 21579 4M File level Archive 42 ME 23 KB EE T 1079 2013 10 26 43 PM Local Disk C 499 6 GE 3 8 GE No 1 1079 2013 10 26 07 PM Basic MER Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 500 GE 14 4 ME I MHo 1 To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E New Yolume E im E Mame Size Date Je arc_hew 10716 2013 10 14 35 PM j arc_new pbf 264 5 KE 10 16 2013 10 14 36 PM arc_new pfi 22MB 10 16 2013 10 14 36 PM gt __jarc_new_0100p 000 BME 10 16 2013 10 14 24 PM a Jarc new _0100p pfm TERE 10 16 2013 10 14 24 PM Jarc new 0101p 000 1 2 MB 10 16 2013 10 14 26 PM 5 s arc new 0101p pfm 1 2 KB 10 16 2013 10 14 26 PM gt jp arc_new_0102p 000 20 6 MB 10 16 2013 10 14 32 PM Hla Jarc_new_0102p phm 4716 10 16 2013 10 14 31 PM Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Comment My hdd 1 Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GB File EB arc_ new arc new
57. Free space after E Bytes OME Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but wall require more time es 9 The block of free space has been released Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey TE unas i 21 28 123 5 GB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved E Data E Hew Yolume 184 6 GE NT 170 2 GE Lin 209 10 Finally increase size of the system partition Call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 11 In the opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right thus increasing its size Pr Are you sure you want to move resize system volume LJ Tou are about to moveresize NTFS volume No label C Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der p aj 31 Volume size a wel MB 12 418 MB 148 276 MB Free space betore 1 ME O bytes 135 556 MB Free space after 1 6 554 MB O bytes 135 056 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exact as it was but will require more time Je 12 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to con
58. GmbH All rights reserved 227 Welcome to the Migrate OS to SSD This utility will help you copy the operating system programs and data to another HOD or 550 A Before you begin please note the following Migration process will delete all the data on the target disk so please make sure you ve saved all the information you need before migrating Due to technical reasons this tool cannot migrate OSes installed on dynamic volumes We are sorry For this 7 Learn more about migrating 05 T All data stored on the destination disk will be lost during the operation Please save it to another location beforehand 5 The wizard will scan your computer for system partitions that accommodate any of the supported Windows OSes If several are found it will let you specify which operating system you d like to migrate Please select an OS to migrate EX Microsoft Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition on Local Disk C NTFS 499 4 GB 13 4 GB used E Microsoft Windows 8 64 bit Edition on Local Disk E 1 NTFS 499 4 GB 10 5 GB used k 6 Depending on your choice it will then automatically pick one or two on disk partitions Windows 7 may have Microsoft System Reserved a special hidden partition that contains boot critical files while in the uEFI GPT mode there will be another hidden partition called EFI System Partition and prompt you to select a destination disk if there are more than two drives besides the source Please select
59. Linux In Linux every partition has a special symbolic name that encodes a hard disk containing a partition and a partition itself Partitions are addressed and accessed by using their symbolic names Symbolic names are automatically generated by Linux in accordance with the order of hard disks in BIOS and the order of partition records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions can lead to changing of paths to some important resources In DOS Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 105 The last versions of MS DOS use a rather sophisticated algorithm for a drive letter assignment A drive letter which is assigned to a partition depends on the order of records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions affects the drive letters assignment In early versions of MS DOS it could even lead to the unavailability of a partition The program provides the ability to change enumeration of the primary partitions This feature will allow you to fix problems concerning an inappropriate order of partitions In order to modify enumeration of the primary partitions you should take the following steps 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Primary Slot There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the
60. Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager You can find it in PTS DOS as well 4 Inthe main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map Hard Disk Partition Wizards Help Basic Hard Disk O VMware Virtual 500 GB i Ea Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Virtual 500 GB __ _ _ _ _ _ _ Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB a Basic GPT Hard Disk3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Basic Hard Disk 1 Model VMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Used Free Wolume label Active Basic Hard Disk 1 Size 500 GB o gt Primary Free 500 GB Mo 5 Choose your s
61. Operations mode lf Allow virtual mode Set this option on to carry out all the operations virtually ou will be able to commit the changes or rollback all of them or the last one IF you switch this option off the operations Will be carted out immediately Close progress dialog automatically Set this option on to automatically close the progress dialog after committing the changes This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when converting FAT and NTFS file systems By default the program takes locale regional settings from the system Problems might occur however because of different standards for file names and file time stamps Created Modified and Last Access Time of NTFS and FATxx file systems To tackle problems of that kind you can manually set e Time zone to use during the convert operation NTFS keeps file timestamps in GMT Greenwich Mean Time while FAT uses a fixed local date and time The program takes proper account of these differences and enables to adjust timestamp values 1 An incorrectly chosen time zone might lead to inability to launch certain software Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 55 e Language for file names to use during the convert operation NTFS stores file names in Unicode while FAT FAT32 uses ANSI to save short file names also called the DOS aliases The codepage information is required for the correct conversion of non English
62. Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 195 O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source CA Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEWYVOLUME e e My computer it Root dir e MyComputer My computer Ka imnt Mounted resources hd imntidisk Local disks hd imedia Removable disks gs IDE CD DVD NECVMWa VMware IDE lt 2 CA EXAFS 1 on Disk 1 NEW VOLUI a NTFS 0 on Disk 0 UFSO is ie NTFS 1 on Disk 0 UFSD disk ET Ls e fe rasrlethils Po EJ i gt ira 6 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 9 MWindows System HDDO Part1 Windows 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech oo System ma Systems2 3 SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Cd Tasks ma Temp ma ToastData 9 tracing Total data size nia Calc Rename F6 Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 7 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Burn data to CD DVD item Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local dr
63. Size Cluster size is one of the crucial parameters of any file system Its value implicitly affects the performance of the files input output activity since it defines the size of the file system metadata Besides the so called waste space factor also depends on the cluster size In order to change the cluster size of a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Cluster Size There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance Ina nutshell larger clusters waste more space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with it Fra Are you sure you Want to change cluster size for partition ee Current cluster size it 8 sectors 4 KB 4 096 Bytes Smaller clusters may provide more effective usage of disk space Please enter new cluster size In sectors eo O The Cluster Size value is expressed in Sectors Per Cluster To get the Cluster Size in Kbytes divide it into half 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Making Logical Primary The program allows you to include a primary partition in the extended parti
64. The operation can be accomplished with the Wipe Wizard or corresponding dialogs Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Wipe Disk or Partition O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e The hard disk partition to wipe Select a hard disk partition the data of which you want to destroy Please choose an object for wiping It can be a whole hard disk a single partition or a block of unallocated space you can set to wipe all data on the partition or only unoccupied space on it see the next step Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l E Local Disk C A data 2 224 7 GE NTFS 2743 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E o Local Disk 499 9 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der A o Unallocated 749 8 GB e Wipe mode This section enables to switch between two options Choose this option if you want to destroy completely all the data on the selected object f Clear wipe free space Choose this option if you want to destroy the traces of data that may have been left after an ordinary delete operation Wipe out all data Select the option to irreversibly destroy all on disk data of the selected object
65. Wizard helps to clone a hard disk e Undelete Partition allows recovery of accidentally deleted partitions e Wipe Wizard enables to destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted files directories e Express Resize Wizard enables to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition e File Transfer Wizard allows coping files folders to another disk or a partition as well as recording them to CD DVD e Boot Corrector helps to correct the Windows System Registry without Windows being loaded e Network Configurator enables to establish a network connection under Linux If you are going to use network resources first launch the Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection e Log Saver helps to collect and send the necessary log files to the Technical Support e View the mounted partitions the list of all mounted partitions will be displayed The Linux DOS recovery environment assigns drive letters to partitions the way it is done in DOS i e one after another primary partitions at first Thus mounted partitions may have different drive letters from Windows e Eject CD DVD e Command Line allows experienced users to execute any operation e Reboot the computer e Power off the computer To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard Safe Mode When the Safe mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu a
66. a method you find the most suitable to create the partition The wizard is especially designed to minimize your participation in finding an appropriate place for it and its resulted size The only thing you re to do is to choose between several modes The most relevant thing here is the amount of space that will be allocated for that partition For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode The result you will get after applying the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der yo Local Disk C l i Es 406 8 GB NTFS 7 Please select the method of new partition creation C Advanced Mode Use 46 4 GB to create a partition More info The number of available methods depends on your disk layout O To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard 4 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 205 5 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer
67. a separate partition E mail Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up pour photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 5 On the next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition pon want to back up Mame Type File system Size Le T CN My Computer My Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive ADO GE Mi First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes ha Master Boot Record MBR O Bytes Local Disk Primary NTFS SOU ME 2 te Local Disk C Primary NTFS 280 36B 4 E Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 fe SiMaster Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 499 6 GB e ENE VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350 MB E Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 750 GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes kw Master Boot Record MER 0 e 1 The size of objects to back up
68. a volume vou would like to delete Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev F Local Disk C SS IG ARA aos U Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey R 9 Unallocated 115 8 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey a o Local Disk 749 9 GB NTFS M A Tou are about to destroy a partition All data on this partition will be lost Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 8 1 As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Merge free blocks As a result of the operation you may get several blocks of the unallocated space on the hard disk So choose whether to merge them all and place at the beginning of the disk or at the end by selecting the required operation from the pull down list Merge free blocks options Do not merge free blocks N r Merge free blocks at the end of the disk Do not merge free blocks Ta Merge free blocks at the beginning of the disk Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests you just to remove references to the selected partition from the Partition Table lt i Are you sure you want to delete volume F Tou are about to delete volume F Local Disk NTFS our computer may o longer boot or work correctly Pleaze enter the volume label to confirm deleting e Enter the volume label to confirm deleting To confirm delet
69. ae Pi program 10 22 2013 5 04 34 AM os i de Recoverpimdedia 10222013 5 01 15 AM o H Dl mb 10 22 2013 5 01 21 AM A opo scripts 10 22 2013 5 01 21 AM Network Places og scripts 10 22 2013 5 01 15 AM PoE o i E Je uir 10 22 2013 5 01 22 AM He e verifped 10 22 2013 5 01 22 AM i E Je Whware 9 3 2013 2 41 44 PM i Je Windows Defender 82222073 12 09 07 PM i de Windows Journal of ee 201S 12 12 42 PM i N Je Windows Mail 6 22 2015 12 09 07 PM i Je Windows Media Player 8222203 12 09 07 PM i Windows Multimedia Platform Bear A013 0 36 45 AM i A Je Windows NT 6 22 2015 8 36 31 AM i Je Windows Photo Viewer of22 2013 12 09 07 PM i Windows Portable Devices Brea 22073 0 36 45 AM F Je WindowsPowerS hell oe 2013 8 36 31 AM Je Program Files 86 9 3 2013 2 54 46 PM m Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM h Je Windows 9 3 2073 10 43 00 AM File name Files of type Executable Files men The program provides the ability to work with three types of executable files exe bat cmd It is up to the user to write batch files to safely prepare applications for backup There are some certain general requirements for that e All programs and commands must execute sequentially and finish before the bat file completes its work e tis recommended to use external commands programs in the following format Start wait program exe The wait option will help to start an application and wait until it completes its work Th
70. archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 172 Basic Hard Disk O VMware Virtual 500 GB Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Virtual 500 GB NTFS New Volume Er NTFS New Volume Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB la NTFS Basic SPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Free Basic Hard Disk O Y Model V Wware Virtual Size 500 GB M Volume Type File System Size Used Free volume label Active Hidden Basic Hard Disk O Size 500 GB o Primary NTFS 350 MB 257 MB 93 1MB System Resen No Na 1 E Primary NTFS 191 GB 609 GB 130 GB Mo label Mo Mo 2 Primary BackupCapsule 141 GB 7 8 GB 133 GB BC Yes Yes 3 Primary Free 168 GB Mo Mo You can also make the program resize the on disk partitions proportionally if necessary by marking the appropriate checkbox All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 Onthe Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk O Your disk before operations Your disk after operations J o J 122 NTFS 9 Inthe Progress window you can s
71. be added to archives Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category chm _ htm mht html pdf txt hip rtf doc Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter docx Delete filter ls xlsx Wii pp pptx wed vd Yst kx Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Add category Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 58 In this section you can find a lot of ready made include filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be processed during file based backup operations thus you automatically ignore files that do not match so they won t be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button 3 Filter Browse Description co You can use wildcards Y and az file name mask Wildcards ld mee rh path are not allowed In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you
72. boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive 8 Unmark checkboxes opposite unnecessary files or folders to try to fit into the destination disk We do not recommend you to exclude system files but those that could take plenty of disk space like video music photos etc Once you re ready with the exclusion click OK to let the wizard calculate the resulted size of the partition Change copy options Please select what Files and Folders should be migrated along with the system Name Size Date OE eM Cookies 9 3 2013 11 08 02 AM V Desktop 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM ta Je Documents 9 3 2013 11 08 36 AM M di Downloads 9 3 2013 11 08 36 AM ta di Favorites 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM M Links 9 3 2013 11 08 37 AM ta di Local Settings 9 3 2013 11 08 02 AM eLo Music 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM na ta di My Documents 4 3 2013 11 08 01 4M Y NetHood 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM NA 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM VS PrintHood 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM V Recent 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM Y Saved Games a 3 2013 11 08 36 AM Y Searches 9 3 2013 1 46 02 PM V D sendTo 9 3 2013 11 08 02 AM e Start Menu 9 3 2013 11 08 02 AM ta Je Templates 9 3 2013 11 08 02 AM Y Videos 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM Y NTUSER DAT 512KB 9 3 2013 1 57 05 PM H 00 ntuser dat LOG1 372 KB 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM Y ntuser dat LOG2 124 KB 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM Y NTUSER DAT 3197985f 0b5d 11 64KB 9 3 2013 11 09 36 AM
73. category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter emr Delete filter A A E Balas blas 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen 8 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected partition archive containing information specified in the wizard It is placed into the same destination as the base image O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating an increment to a full file backup To update a file backup please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create Incremental File Archive 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base file archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 159 S E E 7 107 972013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 4 KB T 107 972013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB T p 10797 2013 11 22 19 PM File level Archive 24 KB Be 1 J 107 972013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 50
74. clicking the appropriate buttons The next page i e What to restore displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 64 What to restore Please select one of the objectis to restore File system El Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE H G New Volume E Primary NTFS 424GB 41 6MB H ESPE VOLUME F Primary FAT32 207GB 20KB EN Primary Linux Ext 2916B 5129 MB H New Volume Primary Apple HFS 229GB 14 7 MB Archive Details Mame NEW VOLUME Y Volume label NEW VOLUME File system Linus Ext Total size 29 1 GB Used space 512 9 MB Free space 6 6 GB To select where to restore the selected objectis click Next Data size to restore 29 1 GB me If you want to restore the image contents click the Next button In order to cancel click the Cancel button Using the Archive Database To open the Archive Database click the Archives tab on the Ribbon Panel The database window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 65 Backup amp Restore Mew Backup Format Partitioning Copy amp Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer Sot 7 Add an Archive to the Archive Database Restore Archive Restore Files Incremental Backup Check Archive Integrity Qs Mount Archive Delete from
75. created with the program are 100 percent flawless If you decided not to control the archive integrity the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time e Set image file names automatically Mark the checkbox to make the program automatically set a file name for every volume of a complex backup image Otherwise you will need to do it manually during the backup operation e Compression level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for backup images that will be used by default e Enable image splitting Mark the checkbox to automatically split every backup image to volumes of a particular size O Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size limitation of some file systems e Maximum split size With the spinner control you can specify a maximum size for backup volumes General Copy and Backup Options General copy and backup options HDD raw processing Copy an entire hard disk sector by sector without taking into account its partition structure Partition raw processing Copw Backup each partition sector by sector All sectors will be processed one by one even Unused sectors Requires more time to complete the operation W Skip archive files stored in archive library Choose this option to skip archive files stored in archive library This will reduce operation time and backup Image size W Automatic BCO update Add boot entry for target partition to BCO h
76. default the utility goes through maximum 30 hops when searching for the target host which you can modify however e Wait timeout milliseconds for each reply By default the utility waits 4 seconds for each echo reply message If not received within the timeout an asterisk is displayed Saving log files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in log files To prepare a log files package please do the following 1 Click Log Saver 2 Provide an e mail address used for registering the product then give a detailed description on the encountered problem in the corresponding text fields Please don t worry we respect your privacy so none of your confidential data will be exposed This utility only collects the program s operation logs to help our Support Team find and tackle your problem Click Next to continue Welcome to Log Saver Wizard Please enter e mail address which was used while registering this product With its help Paragon Support Department will be able to associate your log files with your request through on line request system TEST
77. difficulties with detecting new hardware DOS in its turn has no problems of that kind but is limited in features The Linux DOS recovery environment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 10 requires no installation and can be of great help when the system fails to boot Besides it offers a Windows XP like environment WinPE based recovery environment Especially for keen followers of Windows our product offers the option to prepare a WinPE based bootable media Unlike the Linux DOS recovery environment it can boast an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version can However its system requirements are much tougher Features Overview This chapter dwells upon key benefits and technical highlights of the product Features Let us list some of the features User Friendly Fault Minimizing Interface Graphical representation of the data to gain a better understanding A handy Launcher to easily find and run the required tasks Comprehensive wizards to simplify even the most complex operations A context sensitive hint system for all functions of the program Previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual operations Backup Facilities Archive Database to help the user easily manage backup images get properties add delete mount etc O This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program
78. exactly what you re looking for But if you want to have multiple backup archives of the same partition reflecting certain time stamps unchanged data will inevitable be Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 26 duplicated in all archives and take additional space on backup media To tackle this issue there has been developed a supplementary technique called Differential Sector Backup A differential archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full archive which forms a base or a parental image in this case thus considerably saving your system resources It is realized by the exact bit wise comparison of the previous partition s data saved in the parental image with the current data that is actually the partition itself To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials what is very convenient Differential Base to a Sector Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday Full Sector Backup Monday restore point Tuesday restore point A Saturday restore point n O This function is only available for single primary and logical partitions Incremental archive is a further way of optimizing the process of disk imaging Unlike differentials it may not only contain data changed since the time of creating a full sector based archive but one of its increments as well thus allowing to save more time and the backup storage The main princip
79. filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter er Delete filter log Delete filter dmp Delete filter Add category Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 57 In this section you can find a lot of ready made exclude filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be ignored during file based backup operations thus you specify the data you d like not to be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button 3 Filter Browse Description ou can use Wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards in path are not allowed men In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not File Backup Include Options ES Include into file backup archive Specity masks for files and folders that must
80. flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here O www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer 4 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to work with USB devices O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 5 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 186 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 Onthe What to Restore page click the standard browse button to find the required archive When done double click on it to select Look in 5 arc_101013062156703 t r arc _091013131559760 pbf File name arc_091013131559760 pbf File type Archive files pbf Y Cancel Help F1 Mazi gt 8 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Disk preview q A Volume Type File System Sze jUsed Volumelabel Basic Hard Disk 3 Size 120 GB Primary NTFS 14 3 GB 164MB New Volume Primary NTFS 8 4 GB 8 9 MB New Volume w w Archive details Type image of the hard disk Archive path im
81. for errors Please note that check operation needs exclusive access to the volume Yon may be asked to restart pour computer to complete the operation Check disk options Automatically fie file system errors 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check Archive Integrity The program provides the ability to check integrity of a backup image The function allows distinguishing between valid and corrupted images before using them The Check Archive Integrity Wizard will help you do that Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Check Archive Integrity O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 123 Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e An archive to verify The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any ee Show archives sz Show all gt Ss E El Ek Type Creation Date Source Object Size Archive Size Flags Corr Mounted 1014225 2 20 44 AM Basic MER Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 500 GE 18 7 ME a MHo 1 10714 2013 2 20 15 4M New Wolume F 499 9 GE 4 2 ME 158 5 ME 1 El F E A o
82. for the Windows partition has turned out to be insufficient for your current needs The only way out is to take some space from your Mac partition thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions To increase size of the Windows partition by taking unused space from the Mac partition please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Resize Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 218 O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 The wizard will automatically select Windows the NTFS file system and Mac the Apple HFS file system partitions of your Boot Camp configuration The wizard will resize space between leopard and Local Disk C on Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware VA ware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Select left partition from a pair of adjacent partitions you would like to resize Aight adjacent partition will be selected automatically Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey On the disk map you can also see the GPT service partition called EFI as well as a 128 megabyte free block between Mac and Windows partitions made with Boot Camp It s just for your information 4 Increase size of your Windows partition with the slider or manually by entering the required va
83. full partition Dackup oooccnconnccnnonanonnnnanonnnonaconnnnaronnonononnnnnnonnnonarrnnonanrnnonnnconnnnncnnnnnaninnss 155 Creating an Increment toa Tull THE DAC KU soci E cobaeinceeaset dalek nda db aa 158 Creating a cyclic partition DACKUD o as 160 Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials ooooocccnonocnnncnnnonnnonaconnnnaronnnnanonnnonaconnonaronnonanonnnnnaconnnnos 163 Recovery SCONM ANOS ia aire rocas 165 Correcting EFI parameters sica ad 165 Correcting BED BOOtCCONE uration Data sia A AA a a 166 FIXING WIndows Startup ablando iii cional clic iia 167 Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule cccoocccnccnocnnnonaconnnnnnonnnnnnccnnonaronnonononnnnnnronnonaronnonanonononanonnnnos 170 Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD ooonnccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononananaccnonananonononononnnonanananaccnnncnananononanonos 173 Restoring a system partition from a network driVe ooccccoonccnncnnonnnnnnncnnnonaconnnnononnnonncnnnonaronnonononnnnnnrnnnonnnrnnonanonononacinnnnns 175 Restoring a system partition from a local drivVe oooccnccnnocononanonnnnnacnnnonanonnnnononnnnnncnnnonaronnonononnnonnrrnnonannnnenanonnnnnannnnnnas 182 Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive ccccccsscccccseccccensececeesececceeceeeeeseceseuseceseuaecesseeeeesaesecessegeceeeenes 185 Restoring 2 Tle Mcrementanisisa hans t lena ae i a ie Rie 187 Restorine atil
84. get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 150 e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Please note that only sector based images of the new type with a pfi index file are available to work with Speci a base image to do an increment for Look tr El Network Storage server spool 2 E gt A Mame Size Date 5 New volume E F E Network Storage servere spool 2 h m Backup HDODO_ 20131029_0713 10 29 2013 8 02 58 AM Gackup_HDDO_20131029_0713 phi 48KB 10 29 2013 8 02 58 AM Files of type VO Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Backup HDDO_ 20131029 0713 Comment Backup image 20131029 0773 File Backup HDDO_ 20131029 0713 Backup HOOO 20131029 0713 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 10 29 2013 8 02 57 AM View archive detailed structure O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Our product enables to create several incremental chains based on one bas
85. in Bluescreen Choose this option to allow engine operations logging when actions need to be restarted and continued in Bluescreen mode Stubact log file truncation Choose a storage life span for the stubact log file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied f Infinite f Minimal f Custom 1 hours Clean now In this section you can set up the program logging engine e Logs directory to specify location of program log files By default all logs are placed to C Program Files Paragon Software product s name program e Write logs in Bluescreen to enable the program logging in a special boot up mode e Stubact log file truncation to specify a storage life span for the stubact log file Infinite not to empty the file ever Minimal to have the file emptied all the time Custom to set a certain storage life span for the file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied We strongly recommend you not to choose the Minimal option as in case of having 1 problems with the program our Support Team won t be able to study operation logs thus help you out Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 60 FTP Sites Options D FTP site settings Look in a e a al Address itp A Create FIPISFTP location Ww Use SFTP connection Address sftp sttp hidriwe strato com Port 22 A
86. is located in partitions but not in un partitioned or hidden sectors as this is the case with MBR uEFI Boot Challenges Introduced back in 2005 by Intel to lift restrictions of the old MBR Master Boot Record and PC BIOS Basic Input Output System uEFI Unified Extensible Firmware Interface is now a recommended platform for new 64 bit Windows 8 computers And the reason is easy to catch besides other unique features impossible for the traditional tandem of BIOS MBR only a uEFl based platform enables to accommodate Windows OS on a partition larger than 2 2T1B Despite all uEFl advantages however it has one quite naughty issue a pretty standard operation with a bootable device for instance involving its connection to another SATA port results in unbootable Windows You ll get the same result if trying to boot from a cloned system hard disk or from a restored hard disk All these problems originate from the way UEFI GPT bundle is organized Microsoft provides how to guides to tackle this type of problems but they demand a great deal of experience from the user involving the use of the cmd diskpart and bcdedit tools Paragon has a better way Introducing an elegant technology realized at the user side as one simple option you can define a system GPT volume you re willing to boot from Below is a list of wizards where the uEFI switch boot device option can be found e Copy Hard Disk Wizard e Copy Partition Wizard e Restore Wizar
87. issue in case of a system malfunction you can get the system back on track in minutes by recovering it from a backup image located on the other partition of the hard drive But that is not all drive partitioning may be used for If you are willing to play games in Windows while browsing the Internet in Linux 100 percent sure that no virus will attack your PC drive partitioning is a necessity In order to run several OSs on a single hard drive you are to create a corresponding number of partitions to effectively delineate the boundaries of each OS Data Sanitization Data security is a two sided problem It is to be made clear that providing confidentiality implies not only information to be stored properly but also be destroyed according to certain rules The first step to protecting yourself is to know exactly which security precautions work and which do not Many people believe the misconception that repartitioning a disk will result in complete destruction of its contents Actually that is not quite so Repartitioning the drive only alters references to partitions in the Partition Table leaving all file data intact In fact there are a number of programs available to successfully recover previously deleted partitions Formatting a drive also does not guarantee data destruction Formatting procedure implies modification of the Master File Table MFT that keeps track of where file contents are stored on the disk and verification of each s
88. its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Speci where you d like to restore Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VHware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i o Hew Volume E 470 4 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey ll o Unallocated 499 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der fi o Unallocated 749 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 WHware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey dl Object details Mame Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used space 10 6 GB Free space 10 5 GB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 182 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 7 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Switch EFI to boot from destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Basic MBA Hard D
89. label Type Primary File system NTFS Root entries 16 Sectors per boot E Sectors per cluster E Seral number 9450 4607 0E46 967E Partition ID OU NTFS ExFST ReFS NTFS version 3 01 Volume size 499 6 GB Partition size 499 6 GB Used space 11 7 GB Free space 487 9 GB Active Ho Hidden No The Properties Panel helps to obtain the following data For a hard disk e Model e Serial number e Type of hard disk basic or dynamic MBR GPT e Total size in GB e Information on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders For a partition e Drive letter assigned to the disk e Volume label if exists e Type of the logical disk e File system e Root entries Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 44 e Serial number e NTFS version e Partition ID e Total size used space and free space in GB etc Besides you can modify practically any partition property by clicking on the required value For a block of free space e Total size in GB Status Bar This is the bottom part of the main window The Status Bar displays menu hints for each item the cursor points to Settings Overview To call the Settings dialog please click Tool Button then select Settings All the settings are grouped into several sections which functions are described in the following paragraphs The list of sections is placed on the left side of the dialog By selecting a sectio
90. launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the system backup is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Look in arc_091013131559760 v E a 5 arc_101013062156703 tt arc _091013131559760 pbf Rename FG Mew folder FT Delete F8 6 Double click on the required backup to open Source FL NTFS 1 on Disk 0 UFSD disk 5 arc_101013091536750 5 arc_101013091716250 O Documents and Settings 9 Partition_0_2 C Perflogs 5 Program Files Cd Program Files x86 ma ProgramData 9 System Volume Information oo Users 3 Windows 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source Window s 9 Mindows System HDDO P art1 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech 3 System ma Systems2 oo SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Tasks man Temp co ToastData 9 tracing Total data size 30 3 KB Rename FG Delete FA Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 198 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the archive 8 Save data to any local drives or a network
91. letter assigned The assignment is Mok recommended if the volume contains a file system not supported by your operating system Assign the following drive letter gt Mo However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a partition you should take the following steps Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 119 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Remove Drive Letter O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Modifying drive letter of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating 1 system After having processed partitions with installed software some programs may not run properly Mount Archive The program provides the ability to assign a drive letter to a partition backup image As a result of the operation you will get a new read only partition in the system to easily browse through its contents and copy the required information even with the standard Windows tools Assign Drive Letter Before you start mounting backup images please study the fol
92. mode when the program will set the most appropriate speed for every CD DVD BD e Bootable ISO image That s the image to be placed together with the backup data By default the program offers its own bootable ISO image which contains a Linux DOS recovery environment However the user is free to use any bootable ISO image e CD DVD BD boot capability The program enables to choose whether any recorded CD DVD BD will be bootable or only the first one for a session or without that function at all e Folder where the ISO image is to be placed When the user decides not to physically burn a CD DVD BD but create an ISO image file this very folder will be used to contain these images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 48 Hot Processing Options A Hot processing options W Enable hot processing Hot processing technology Microsoft Yolume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service ls a reliable technology designed to back up volumes being locked by numerous active transactions of 55 supporting applications Micrasoft 55 technology requires over 300 MB of free space on any mounted NTFS volume for temporary data This technology i provided for Windows SP and newest Windows versions but unavailable for old versions of Windows 98 ME AT 72000 Additional options f Always use hot processing f Use hot processing only when partition is locked Hot processing temporary drive
93. of the program installed on the computer the program will offer the user to uninstall it first 1 Click on the supplied setup file to initiate the installation First your system will be checked for the presence of Visual Studio C 2010 Runtime Library and if not found you will be prompted to install it comes with the installation package Click Install to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 18 Status Requirement Pending Visual C 10 0 Runtime 66 10 0 30319 1 2 The Welcome page will inform that the application is being installed Click Next to continue 3 Please Read Paragon License Agreement carefully and then select the appropriate option to accept Otherwise you won t be able to proceed with the installation By clicking the Print button the license agreement may also be printed out 4 Provide your product key and serial number 5 On the Customer Information page you are to provide the standard customer information i e a user name and an organization Besides you need to decide whether to make the program available for all users of this computer if several or only for the current one 6 On the next page click Change to install the utility to a different location by default C Program Files Paragon Software Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 Professional Edition Otherwise click Next to continue Do not install the program on network drives Do not use Terminal Server
94. one of the supported virtual disks you will see detailed information on it below Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 251 Local WD Sphere Lookin E LocalDisk C El F Mame Size Date Ta mogeoorage POO Te I di Perflogs 822 2013 12 50 47 AM di Program Files 10 10 2013 12 18 37 AM di Users 9 3 2013 3 24 45 PM a de YD Storage 10 14 2013 2 09 42 4M be Server 2003 64 bit dl TMB 10142073 2 09 42 4M ge WB Test Vip Disk2 vmdk 256 KB 10 14 2013 2 09 42 AM Vista 64 Bit wi 1MB 10 14 2013 2 09 42 AM Fe OX 32 bit vhd 2MB 10 14 2013 2 09 42 AM GE Windows 94342013 10 55 03 AM 2 DYD Drive D Local Disk E gt A sn Files of type All virtual disk images ka Disk into VMware virtual hard disk IDE Capacity 1 GB 1 073 741 624 Bytes Although you re allowed to map a network share for connecting a virtual disk we do not recommend it due to modest performance especially when you need to accomplish drive partitioning O Virtual disks connected from CD DVD BD will be available for reading only All earlier connected virtual disks get on a special list which can be seen by clicking the Recent virtual disks tab inactive initially Just select a disk you ve already worked with and then click Connect for the fast connection 3 By default the selected virtual disk will be connected in the read write mode until you d
95. pbt Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 124 Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Check Recovery Discs You ve got the ability to check whether backup media created with the program is 100 percent error free and ready to use The Check Recovery Disc Wizard will help you do that Startup e Click Tool Button then select Check Recovery Discs There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Startup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation CD DVD drive Select from the pull down list of available CD DVD devices the required drive to use during the operation Drive NE CY Mw ar Y Mware IDE CORIO Eject the disc after check Set whether to eject the disk after the operation is completed or not Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Edit View Sectors With the built in Edit View Sectors tool the program enables to view edit sectors on existing partitions hard disks providing the possibility to directly access and modify sectors save and restore sectors from sp
96. reserved 266 Drive Toots SP A E S j Computer View Manage a 2 er ji f Bm lt 2 A es A Uninstall or change a program A EZ System properties Properties Open Rename Access Map network Add a network Open Control media drive location Panel A Manage ri t gt ThisPC v Search This PC Tr Favorites 4 Folders 6 Ml Desktop 3p Downloads Desktop lt Documents Recent places Downl Homegroup h a E This PC E Pictures E Network 4 Devices and drives 5 a Local Disk C lt a Floppy Disk Drive Ac yA 9 49 GB free of 19 6 GB System Reserved E DVD RW Drive D E E a Y 90 5 MB free of 349 MB E Local Disk F 11 items l item selected If going to the main launcher of our program right now Open Advanced Interface this very volume will be detected as Not formatted thus no backup restore or copy operation will be available for it Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev BJ System Reserved E E Local Disk C 350 Me NTFS IB 196GENTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev J Local Disk F 19 5 GB Not formatted 2 To unlock it please right click of the mouse on the corresponding volume in Windows Explorer then select Unlock Volume or use the corresponding option of the main launcher Partition gt Unlock Volume O There are other way
97. share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD BD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select your system disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Look in DA NTFS O on Disk 3 New Volume EEEE 9 RECYCLE BIN 9 System Volume Information ma Users Hernani PO Mew folder FT Delete E File name Iimntidisksdd1 Select File type All files y Cancel 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress oe ae eae EEE Operation progress Copied so far 0 1 MB Overall progress Lea a SaaS Time elapsed 00 00 00 Time to finish 00 00 00 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbf to HDO Parti Item 1 of 1 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 199 13 Turn
98. specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 179 Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey if Backup Capsule 219 3 GB Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 196996 10263 MB 196996 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition E OME Please specify size of free space after the partition 0 OMB Partition Restore Options Assign the following drive letter gt 8 Onthe next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer For pVHD images 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can O get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Select Switch to Full Scale Launcher then click the Restore from VD item of the Wizards menu 3 On the Rest
99. specify drive letter for the second partition E By default the wizard allocates all free space to the original partition You should decide O for yourself how much of it should be given to the original and the new partitions Anyway we strongly recommend you to allow free space on both partitions 7 Review the changes and complete the wizard 8 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 213 Merging a system partition with an adjacent logical partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent logical partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To merge a system partition with an adjacent partition please do the following 1 Inthe main window select the required logical volume on the Disk Map Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Local Disk C 280 3 GB NTFS Hew Volume
100. target disk The wizard is going to copy Ex Microsoft Windows 8 1 on Local Disk C 1 NTFS 224 7 GB 19 2 GB used To the one of the Following disks ic Diski model VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew 500 GE A The disk contains 2 partitions they will be deleted during 25 migration ES Disk 2 model VMware YMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10 GB 7 Ifthe selected disk is not enough in capacity to hold your OS just our case or you d like to remove redundant data from the process click on the corresponding link to additionally exclude files from the system partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 228 Cannot copy OS to target disk The wizard is going to copy c Microsoft Windows 8 1 64 bit Edition on Local Disk 70 3 NTFS 499 4 GB 10 6 GB used To Disk 1 model VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCST Disk Dey 10 GB Ab Unfortunately the capacity of your hard disk doesn t allow to copy the entire Local Disk C partition The wizard can copy the system leaving aside some programs or data Please select what CUE should be copied Use all available space for the partition with OS Use this option to expand the partition with 65 so it will use all available space on the disk This option is recommended if you are not going to create other partitions on the hard disk you re migrating to Create new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI
101. task ort 1107 320134 at 12 00 AM Every 1 a day s Do not run the task after 1071372013 Speci user name and password Discard all operations on close 4 Inthe opened dialog enter the required task name and specify the task timetable 5 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation O This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations Scripting The program actions can also be represented in form of a script The script describes the appropriate operation with macro language commands There is an interpreter utility SCRIPTS exe which is included in the program installation package This utility works in the unattended mode which enables to automate operations Startup You have no need to write a script since the program has a convenient interface for such a task In order to generate a script on the base of the entered parameters of the required operation you should take the following steps 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to be scripted 3 Call the Generate Script dialog by clicking its icon on the Virtual Operations Bar Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 113 Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Generate button to confirm the operation Generate script
102. the Archive Database Restore WD Archive Synthetic Backup Incremental File Backup Restore File From Archive Unmount Archive Convert to Wirtual Machine Differential Backup Create File Complement Archives database Manage archives Mount options af Apply K Discard View Changes ly Undo Redo Ss Reload Disk Info Generate Script Save to Scheduler Express Mode YD Archive of NTFS Volume New Volume iell size Si Basic data partition 3500 f E Boot Source Object Size 53GB E Recovery Archive Size 1 MB B System Volume Informati Creation Date 10 17 2013 3 12 08 AM A Comments Increment 1 Chain 2 E 2 ee alee Flags Increment Differential BOOTN T 1 By a iome i BOOTSECT BAK 5 B 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk 750 I gt UN Eho VD containers E Show partitions S B B Ek Type Creation Date Source Object Size Archive Size Flags Comment Mounted 5 104172013 31208 AM New Volume 5 3 GE IMB 3 Increment 1 Chain 2 5 10172013 3 08 48 AM Local Disk 441 GB 279MB HB 3 Increment 2 5 10172013 2 02 14 AM Local Disk 441 GB 279MB HB 3 Increment 1 5 10716 2013 8 41 21 PM Recovery el MB 47 GB Backup image 20131015 16339 5 10162013 8 41 21 PM New Volume 53 GE 47GB m Backup_image_20131015_1639 5 10162013 8 41 21 PM Local Disk 441 GB 47GB Backup_image_20131015_ 16349 5 10162013 8 41 21 PM NO MAME 100 ME 47GB al Backup_image_20131015_ 1639 5 10162013 8 41 21 PM Local Disk 128 MBE 47GB ai Back
103. the Browse button In the opened dialog you can see several options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 137 Look ir F Local Disk C al amp Y Address C UsersAdministrator Desktop Disk Drives pene Hele q PO eo a y archive_db 11420753 U1 1b aM gt oF PerfLogs 8 22 2013 8 22 35 AM E y Program Files 10 22 2013 5 01 15 AM Partitions Eje Program Files 86 9 3 2013 2 54 48 PM Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM ER Administrator 10 29 2013 6 36 23 AM GE Jo kchmviewer 10 23 2013 7 12 13 AM Contacts 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM See Desktop 10 29 2013 6 45 32 AM Documents 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM Downloads 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM Favorites 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM oi in DNI AO AT Dhd Select Disk Drives to use a local disk as backup destination Select Partitions to use a physical partition as backup destination Click on the Map Network Drive icon to map a network share to use it as backup destination our case 5 To map a network share please do the following Remote location mapping A network share eerverc pool h etvwork Storage El Map to drive letter Y Y Make permanent connection Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise i
104. the amount of data to move which may take some time Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 212 Mame Size Dake a de Program Files 10 9 2013 5 50 43 4M E Le Program Files 86 10 9 2013 11 01 16 PM Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM A de Administrator 10 9 2013 10 26 37 PM Public 8 22 2013 8 36 32 AM L dl o User 9 3 2013 10 45 59 AM Po de Contacts 4 3 2013 10 45 56 4M E de Desktop 4 3 2013 10 45 56 4M 4 Documents a 3 2013 10 45 59 AM Downloads 9 3 2013 10 45 59 AM f Favorites 9 3 2013 10 45 56 AM Links 9 3 2013 10 46 00 AM a di Music a 3 2013 10 45 56 AM En ictures 9 3 2013 10 45 56 AM ici m Saved Games 4 3 2013 10 45 59 AM E de Searches 4 3 2013 2 40 10 PM Li Videos 9 3 2013 10 45 56 AM Lp Le Windows 10 9 2013 11 01 29 PM addins 8 22 2013 8 36 36 AM de ADFS 8 22 2013 8 36 31 AM y 6 Redistribute free space between the partitions by moving the slider or manually by entering the required value for the new partition in the corresponding field Then choose a drive letter for this partition from the pull down list that contains vacant letters if necessary by default the wizard selects the first vacant one Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der i Local Disk C i SPLITVOL E 168 4 GB NTFS 111 8 GE NTFS Splitted partition size 1 14556 MB Min size 72 MB F Max size 224451 MB Please
105. the list the two will automatically display detailed information on it To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Disk Properties chapter Since the Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List have the same purpose the user is allowed to extend only one at the moment by using a corresponding arrow button Context sensitive Menu The Context sensitive Menu shows a list of operations available for an object disk partition or block of free space selected either on the Disk Map or the Disk and Partitions List If you click a corresponding record the appropriate wizard or dialog will be started All default values for the operation parameters will correspond to the object s settings If there too many items on the list type in the first word of the required command in the Search commands field to filter the list Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 43 Back Up Partition Burn Partition on COL DVD or BD Copy Partition Restore Partition Format Partition Delete Partition Move Aesize Partition Convert File Syster Defragment Partition Defragment MFT Compact MFT Change Volume Label Hide Partition Mark Partition as Active Properties Panel The Properties Panel provides information on the object disk partition or block of free space selected either on the Disk Map or the Disk and Partitions List Local Disk E Yolume letter C VYolume label bo
106. the same with the left edge Make sure the partition size has been left unchanged Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 208 w Are you sure you want to move resize volume E You are about to moveresize NTFS volume Data E Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey T 177 Unallocated o Data E 123 5 GE 184 6 GE NTFS Volume size 1 64 087 MB 25 000 MB 315 647 MB Free space before 1 6 554 MB O bytes 290 640 ME Free space after 0 Bytes O bytes 290 640 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exact as it was but will require more time es Mo 7 Now you can resize the extended partition to take the block of free space out of it Call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog O Call a context menu for the extended partition with the blue border not the logical one 8 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the extended partition to the right w Are you sure you want to move resize extended partition on disk 0 Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey G Cr Data E 177 New Volume 123 5 GB 154 6 GE NTFS 170 2 GE Linux Ext4 Volume size 363 374 ME 363 374 MB 489 928 MB Free space before 1 6 554 MB O bytes 16 554 MB
107. to Clipboard by pressing the Add button To delete a file directory from the Clipboard select it in the Clipboard pane and press the Remove button You can also create a new folder rename or irreversibly delete existing files directories of the left pane by pressing the appropriate buttons Clipboard Source El Local Disk F BX Images F images Mame 8 BOOTNXT 2 3 5 config sys l 2 8 pagetile sys e a swvaptile sys gt I pvo AM Drive D PARAGON E New Yalume E E Local Disk F ee Je System Volume Information Total data size 1 GB O Files directories deleted from the Clipboard remain intact on source disks Destination to store the object s The File Transfer Wizard allows copying data to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned or burning them to CD DVDs Choose the way the data will be stored TARIE are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the data f Save data to physical partitions f Burn the data to CO DWD or BD Revision of changes The Transfer Summary page provides structurally divided information on all the actions made in the wizard Check the changes and come back to any step of the wizard if necessary by following the required hyperlink Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 118 Please overview the transfer options
108. to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch a boot mode you need Normal Safe Low Graphics Safe in the Boot menu O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject Boot menu 32 bit environment a Normal y Main recovery 4 Safe Mode environnent 4 Low Graphics Safe Mode a Floppy disk SS Hard disk A MBR SS Find OSes on your hard disks e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Low Graphics Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS safe mode In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu e Floppy Disk Reboot the computer from a system floppy disk e Hard Disk 0 Boot from the primary hard disk e Find OS s on your hard disks The program will scan hard disks of your computer to find any bootable operating system Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 21 64 bit environment BOOT MENU Start Paragon RCO in sate mode Reboot Power ott e Normal Mode
109. to disks As a result an online data processing cannot boast high operating speed Our program supports both offline and online methods of data processing As far as online method is concerned it offers its own hot processing algorithm together with the possibility to use snapshot technologies provided by the Microsoft VSS framework Paragon Hot Processing Technology Paragon Hot Processing is an online copy backup technology for Windows NT family operating systems Developed back in 2001 nowadays it is integrated with all copy backup solutions offered by the company Paragon Hot Processing is not exactly a snapshot technology though it has much in common with it During an online copy backup the program uses the kernel mode driver HOTCORE SYS to intercept and control disk write activity of applications and the operating system The hotcore driver as an integral part of the program is installed during the setup procedure that s why the system reboot is required to complete the setup procedure For the most part the driver is in the idle mode until it is activated with the program While in this mode it bypasses any calls having no effect on the overall system performance but a few kilobytes of the system memory Paragon Hot Processing technology offers copy backup of locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements O It is not recommen
110. will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see the newly created NTFS partition Now you ve got a place to keep your stuff apart from Windows Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Resize O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Click on your system partition By doing that the wizard will automatically select an adjacent partition as well This partition will later act as a space donor The wizard will resize space between Local Disk C and New Yolume E on Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Select left partition from a pair of adjacent partitions you would like to resize Aight adjacent partition will be selected automatically Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtua
111. would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 8 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 146 Exclude masks manage files and folders that will be excluded from archive Specht exclude masks T Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter mel Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter 31 Auxiliary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter emr Delete filter A A E Balas blas 9 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive Ft Ry No commen 10 To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data we strongly recommend you to pass
112. your network device Ethemet adapter Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection IP address configuration eee Obtain an IP address automaticaly Renew address Release address f Use the following IP address IP Address 192 16840 170 Subnet Mask 255 255 285 Default Gateway 192768402 Advanced DNS WINS configuration e Obtain DNS server address automaticaly DNS server 192 168 40 2 Advanced e Obtain WINS server address automaticaly Primary WINS server 192 168 40 2 Secondary WINS server Jo o 0 0 Load from file Save to file Apply Cancel 3 Click the Network drivers tab to map a network share Map Network Drive Disconnect Drive 4 Click Map Network Drive and provide all the necessary information to map a network share in the opened dialog Remote location mapping A network share ES Map to drive letter z Make permanent connection x Connect as user Cancel Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 262 e Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it e Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters e Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary By clicking Disconnect Drive you can delete an existing network share if neces
113. 01 4 00 00 PM m netw940 inf 24KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM e g netwlan2 inf 8KB 6 19 2003 12 05 04 PM 5 netwv48 inf 9 8KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM BE nebwzc in 3 7KB 6 19 2003 12 05 04 PM y Files of type INF files inf Please select hardware the driver is designed for Compex RL2000 PCI Ethemet Adapter 1 O 22 Winbond W89C940 PCI Ethemet Adapter Only show hardware found on this computer Select an INF file Cancel Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 240 When selecting an INF file that contains several driver records for hardware you both have in the system and don t have you can filter the list by marking the appropriate checkbox e Remove a driver for a device which has not been found in the system XA ee Remove the selected device From the installation list Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Secondary IDE Channel ginntinn mehde int S Primary IDE Channel ginntinn mehde int Intel A 823774BfEB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller ginntinn mehde int YHware 5051 Controller xl i E mE i ess uF Virtualizing the current system P2V Copy Let s assume that you re about to migrate to a brand new hardware platform with the latest operating system available for it Your current system is quite obsolete but you still need access to some of its software You don t want to waste time re installing the old software to t
114. 07 PM Local Disk C 477 GB 26 7 GB J 10797 2013 17 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes J 10797 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 49KB ho J 1079 2013 11 1518 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB ol 4 Switch to File View Archive File Details Mame Local Dizk Comment MHo comment Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used space 9 7 GB Free space 1 2 GB File Ya editt 101013084041 587 pbf To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 164 Look ir E pool Paserrera r A E Name Size Date g T El pu Je arc 0970131257 56058 10 10 2013 12 51 36 AM de arc 09101391 33756622 10 10 2013 1 43 35 AM diff 101013084041587 10 10 2013 2 00 08 AM A A pb 25GB 10 10 2013 2 00 094M Files of type Archive files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Local Disk Comment No comment Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size
115. 1 MB 511 993 MB Free space before 0 97 MB Sif Obytes 511 891 43 MB an LA a A Voimme size aise Free space after 237 20152MB Sf Obytes 511 823 61 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don contain any dats This slows you to keep the parttion s content after move exactly as t was but will require more time O The Move Resize dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 4 Now you have a block of free space sufficient in size to hold a new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Vista C Unallocated 158 7GB NTFS 341 2GB 5 Create a new partition to install Windows XP To do that please call the context menu for a newly created block of free space right click of the mouse button and launch the Create Partition dialog Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 07 You are about lo oesie a new partition in Unallocated 341 2 GB ares Please select size postion and He system of the new partion Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev l w New Volume F 341 2 GE NTFS Create new partition as CATE Please specty new partition sine 149451 7MB 349 451 M Please soecty size of free space before the partition 0 al OMB 345 437 MB Please specty size of free space aler tha partion 7 OMB
116. 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 39 IB gt Tool Button T 7 E 2 la Sh El n p I Ribbon Panel Backup Restore Backup Backup Complement File Archive Capsule Backup Integrity Backup Hew Rackup Format Partitioning Copy Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer sot Smart Differential Incremental Create File Create Incremental Manage Synthetic Check Archive Cyclic Backup Restore Advanced backup Backup utilities O Save to Scheduler Express Mode el Apply gt lt Discard View Changes Unda Tir resto Disk map Virtual Operations Bar N ido DS m Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware YHware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Back Up Hard Disk i System Reserved 7 Local Disk C Burn Hard Disk on CO DVD or BD 360 MB NTFS 499 6 GB NTFS Restore Hard Disk Convert to GPT hard disk Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey Undelete Partitions Disk Map System Reserved Unallocated Update MBA C Chance slots ontext sensitive 350 MB NTFS 499 6 GB HleTE te Men a A eno Wipe hard disk Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual SCS Disk Dev EditWiew Sectors Unallocated Properties 745 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev Unallocated 11996B Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Properties Panel Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Status Online Total size 500 GB Sectors per track 63 He
117. 271 The term backup originates from the time when the best way to protect valuable information was to store it in form of archives on external media It s become now a general notion to mean making duplications of data for protection purposes Bootable Archive is created by adding a special bootable section when backing up the data to CD DVDs Thus you will be able to restore the data from these archives without having to run the program but by simply booting from these CD DVDs Cluster is the smallest amount of disk space that can be allocated to hold a file All file systems used by Windows organize hard disks based on clusters which consist of one or more contiguous sectors The smaller the cluster size the more efficiently a disk stores information If no cluster size is specified during formatting Windows picks defaults based on the size of the volume These defaults are selected to reduce the amount of space that is lost and the amount of fragmentation on the volume A cluster is also called an allocation unit Extended Partition is a partition type you create only on a basic MBR Master Boot Record disk Extended partition is used if you want to create more than four volumes on a disk since it may contain multiple logical drives File System Metadata The servicing structures of a file system which contain information about allocating files and directories security information etc are named the file system metadata It is invisible f
118. 3 AM de Program Files 86 10 9 2013 11 01 16 PM de Users 9 3 2013 2 40 22 PM de Windows 104942013 11 01 29 PM E Local Disk F 5 New Yolure G 5 pool server r 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive name larc_1 0101 3093650000 7 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 145 Include masks manage files and folders that will be added to the archive IF include mask 12 specified all the files that do not conform to the mask will be omitted and wall not get Into the archive e Use include masks Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category Chm Delete filter htm Delete filter mht Delete filter html Delete filter pdf Delete filter txt Delete filter hip Delete filter rtf Delete filter doc Delete filter docx Delete filter ls Delete filter xlsx Delete filter wn Delete filter ppt Delete filter pptx Delete filter Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Filter Browse Description O You can use wildcards and Y to specify the mask cred e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you
119. 4 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 162 Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task We Do not reboot if reboot i required System shutdown after backup Start the task ort 10 09 2013 at 12 00 AM Every 1 week s or W Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Do not run the task after 1070972013 Specify user name and password O To know more on the subject please consult the Task Scheduling chapter 8 On the Cyclic backup type page choose the way of creating a cyclic backup There are several types of the cyclic backup the Wizard can perform Please choose the one you would like to carry out Cycle Backup Type f Basic type Eyer image made during the operation will be created as a complete base Image f Differential type Every first image will be made as a complete base image all the others will be differentiated from it 4 differential backup only contains changes in the partitions contents with respect to a complete image e Base type Every image created during the operation will be made as a full archive e Differential type Every first image will be made as a full base archive and all the others will be differentiated from it This operation requires much less space thus considerably saving your system resources By setting the Maximum disk space to store images and the Maximum number of images to store parameters you may def
120. 43 AM di arc 101013091 716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM m arc 101013140759053 10102013 7 22 40 AM di arc 101013141139475 10 10 2013 7 12 58 AM Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Local Disk C Comment No comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 499 6 GB Used space 10 5 GB Free space 489 1 GB File C arc 0910131251 56058 arc_ 0910131 25156058 pbf aly To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Backup Capsule 215 3 GB All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 5 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 185 Your hard
121. 4M will be extracted to Za Address Es Disk Drives A Network Places a Lts H arc_hew H de PerfLogs iI di Frogram Files E di Program Files 86 7 di Users H Windows 5 Click the OK button to accomplish the operation O The current version of the program does not enable to access pVHD images and file archives with Volume Explorer Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 204 Resize Scenarios Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Let s assume that you re a rank and file user who is most likely to have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To secure yourself against a system malfunction or a virus attack you ve got nothing to do but make a backup of the whole partition which besides the operating system itself contains all your family photos favorite films and music program distributives whatever As a result you ll get a very huge backup image You can easily tackle this issue however by detaching your operating system from the rest of data To create a new partition on your hard disk please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Create O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Choose
122. 6 2012 11 39 50 PM BD ROM Drive D H 8 DVD Drive E Files of type All virtual disk images Disk info Microsoft Virtual PC hard disk Capacity 8 7 GB 9 438 879 44 Bytes 4 Our wizard will detect a version of Windows OS inside the image and offer to specify a virtualization software vendor At the present moment the vhd format is supported by Microsoft Virtual PC Server Hyper V and Oracle VirtualBox We choose the last one The following OS will be used as quest Lal indows Vi H H Windows Vista Please select a virtual software vendor gt VMware Workstation VMware Fusion Microsoft Virtual PC Oracle VirtualBox 5 Set properties of the future virtual machine e Virtual machine version Please make sure you choose a version which is supported by your virtualization software otherwise you won t be able to work with the newly created machine Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 250 e Virtual machine name By default the wizard picks the name of your guest OS which can be modified however e CPU number If your computer supports multiprocessing select how many CPUs you d like to allocate for the virtual machine e Memory amount Depending on the guest OS the wizard calculates the recommended size of RAM which can be modified however Virtual machine version Oracle VirtualBox 4 A Virtual machine name My_Vista_ Backup CPU number 1 ee Memory amount 768 MB
123. 6250 1010 2013 2 17 49 AM PerfLogs 8422 2013 0 22 35 AM Program Files 10 9 2013 5 50 43 4M Program Files x86 10942013 11 01 16 PM A Le ProgramData 10 9 2013 11 01 18 PM i m System Volume Information 1049 2073 6 17 05 AM Users 94342013 2 48 22 PM E y Administrator 107972013 10 26 37 PM Defaut 6 22 2013 12 11 25 Ph AppData 8422 2013 9 36 30 AM Desktop 842242013 8 36 30 AM e MD ocuments 6 22 9013 7 45 52 AM a de Downloads of 2e 2073 8 36 30 AM Favorites 8 22 2013 8 36 30 AM f Links 8422 2073 8 36 30 AM Lo Music 8422 2013 9 36 30 AM f Pictures 8 22 2013 8 36 304M 5 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 157 Include masks manage files and folders that will be added to the archive IF include mask 12 specified all the files that do not conform to the mask will be omitted and wall not get Into the archive e Use include masks Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category Chm Delete filter htm Delete filter mht Delete filter html Delete filter pdf Delete filter txt Delete filter hip Delete filter rtf Delete filter doc Delete filter docx Delete filter ls Delete filter xlsx Delete filter wn Delete filter ppt Delete filter pptx
124. 69 bc 67 20 6d ar Pleaze select sector number q je O0 OF cd bh O1 k d 02 ol 15 00 00 00 10 Ba Oc Ba tf bo O0 75 00 66 O0 07 Bb f4 49 be 6l 73 ZO 00 Le be c Te BA 55 v4 O0 BA de de 80 56 76 df bh qe O2 BA OF eb tO eb be 20 Ed 79 65 O0 11 El O0 13 00 56 cd 03 00 10 eb O2 Te 00 00 eb al 00 00 cd 08 ac fd 76 v4 63 fa ve 63 T TO ad EE P je Si TO 55 Sd 46 66 bd be be a0 13 ad ed 66 O2 66 O0 Da bb 00 bc be 67 65 v4 Ya ar a de Le Of 46 Of 66 76 Ba O2 cd Bd eb 75 00 co ve DB 66 f6 eb ga Ed Ed 65 bf O0 be 4c ar de D6 B5 11 al 60 O8 56 bh 13 Ba de 17 bl 75 2c O0 BA ea 03 bh eb 20 O0 70 4d 67 th ar 00 00 10 O0 da v4 O0 13 O0 te Bd 55 Ed 75 54 O0 66 66 cd ed cd fa 64 ve 69 be v4 20 Lo e y Y 3A DM A Ga 17 M00Ph A a l Y UEF Asa Jr ZA t pr f tfh EYW lh h B V SfuUth fh ah 1 220 6 T E A be ebbey Esde Alnvalid tion table loading op ng y tem H g operating em c rli Careless use of the Edit Sectors function may result in the irreversible data corruption Send Log Files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program
125. 8 1737 AM E E ackup HODO 20131029 0773 ph J6 KE 102232013 8 18 15 AM Files of type YO Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Backup HDDO_ 20131029 0713 Comment Backup image 20131029 0773 File Backup HDDO_ 20131029 _0713 Backup HDDO_20131029_0713 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 10 29 2013 8 02 57 4M View YD container detailed structure Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 181 5 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore Please select hard disk or partition to restore IF you need to restore several objects at once please use Linux based Recovery Media Mame Type File system Size Used Backup _HDDO_201 31029 0713 YD Archive 11 5 GB 12 362 911 744 Bytes Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 PVHD i Virtual Hard Disk Drive 3500 GE E System Reserved Primary NTFS 350 MB 256 8 ME Primary NTFS 21 2 GBE 10 5 GB m iNew Volume Primary NTFS 478 4 GBE 43GB Archive Details Name Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 10 6 GB To continue click Next Data size to restore 41 2 GB If you need to restore several backup objects from a pVHD image in one operation please use the Linux based recovery media 6 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of
126. 9 5 KB he 1 4 E Switch to File view Archive File Details Total size 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Backup date 10 9 2073 11 22 79 PM Archive size 309 Bytes Comment No comment is available File E arc 0970137 37559760 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Local Disk 0 EX E Name Size Date 2 E Local Disk C Ge arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 11 17 27 PM arc_091013131559760 10 9 2013 11 22 08 PM O di arc_101013062156703 10 9 2013 11 22 08 PM J de FLOOOOO0000000000000 10 9 2013 11 22 19 PM et mm archive phi 309 Bytes 1092013 11 22 19 Ph Jarc_091013131559760 pf 28 3MB 10 9 2013 6 22 48 AM gt arc_09101 3133756622 10432207 5 6 38 02 AM Files of type Archive files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Total size 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Backup date 10 9 2073 11 22 19 PM Archive size 389 Bytes Comment No comment is available File Canc 0910131315595760 archive phi Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights rese
127. 994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 73 a ace new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive O The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Result The wizard will restore the archived data and make it available to use in the operating system To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule e Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD e Restoring a system partition from a network drive e Restoring a system partition from a local drive e Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive e Restoring a file increment e Restoring a file increment to a partition backup e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Copy Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to make a copy of a hard disk or a separate partition Cloning Hard Disks You can clone a hard disk of any file system During the hard disk copying process the program moves controlling records of used partitioning scheme the bootstrap code and on disk partitions That s why this operation cannot be substituted by simply copying all on disk partitions Copy Hard Disk Wizard
128. A Ae 121 PAER e E A E E AE A E E EE E E AE E T 121 CHECK FIE SYSTEM INTE ENI V AAA E E S aecteesctee 122 Check Archive testi sd e o al Tao 122 CHECK REC eii 124 AA A aaa hoe iea aan tech A eater te he laces 124 A paces tanto E E A A 125 VICW EOZ Sida das 126 Typical Scenarios sarietsoessctectccaicetecahazceccuete cece E 127 Backup cenas vagn a a a dicas 127 Creating the Backup Cap UNS caro 127 Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule ccccccesssccccsseccceesececcesecceeeesccesseseceseeeeceeseenceeseusecetsugeseeseges 129 Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD occnnccnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnananananonacanonononononononnnananacccnncnccnnnnnononoss 131 Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive cccccccsssecccceseccccesececeeececeeeccceeusccecauseceseueecesseenceeseuecesseneceesenes 133 Backing Up Heston FUP SFP SAN A A O 138 Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB driVe cccooocccnccnccnnonononnnonaconnnnanonnnonaconnonaronnonononnnonnnnnnonanrnnonanonononanannnnns 141 Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition oonccccncccnnnnnnncccnnnnnnnnnnnnos 143 creatine a alfterentiarto a tul Daruton Wa GKUD iaa 146 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Creating a sector increment TOV AD aaa 149 Creating a sector Increment toa Tull partition DackKUPD sica idad 152 Creating a file increment to a
129. All virtual operations you have made will be written to the script No operations Will be applied Please specify a name for the task script file Iscript_1 4101305511732 ps W Add to Task List Witte a script comment here w More options No e Script file name and location By default the program offers to add the script to the Task List with a name containing its creation date and time Unmark the Add to Task List checkbox to define an exact location and a filename for the script file The default file extension that is reserved for scripting files is psl which however can be modified e Add to Task List By default the script will be automatically added to corresponding list If necessary add a small comment to it In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page so you will be able to define Please select script generation options Allow to interact with the user Turn this option off if you do not want to get confirmation dialogs when the script is being carried out W Commit after each operation Turn this option on to ensure the changes will be committed after each operation W Check for errors after each operation Turn thi option on to make scrpt interpreter to check the result of each operation Use disk ID Turn this
130. B First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes kw Master Boot Record MER 0 ue 4 The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB a time O The current version of the program enables to make a cyclic backup of only one partition at 4 On the Backup Destination page select a mounted unmounted partition a network share or an FTP server to place backup images to Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 161 Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location C a 091013141 2392 rA x Size Date Mame LY My Computer Mo El Local Disk C CN Network 5 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name larc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 6 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commer 7 Seta timetable for the operation Copyright 199
131. Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive a differential backup of the selected partition It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk the Backup Capsule or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a sector increment to pVHD You re allowed to do several incremental chains based on one base pVHD To update a pVHD backup image please do the following 1 Click the New Backup Format tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Incremental Backup to VD 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Please note that only sector based images of the new type with a pfi index file are available to work with Speci a base image to do an increment for T Show all amp Bb Fe 10 29 2013 8 02 57 AM YO Container 500 GE Archive Size Switch to File view Archive File Details Mame Backup _ HO0 O 20131029 0713 Comment Backup image 20131029 0773 File Backup HDDO_ 20131029 0713 Backup HDDO_20131029_0713 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 10 29 2013 8 02 57 4M View archive detailed structure To continue click Next To
132. ISO image You can get these utilities here O www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu O By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 193 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 5 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source CA Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEW YOLUME e My computer ES Ka Root dir i MyComputer My computer et imnt Mounted resources i imntdisk Local disks f media Removable disks IDE CD DYD NECVMWa VMware IDE Se CA Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEW VOLU Renaris Fa Nelete Fa 7 Select
133. ISOFTWARE GROUP G PARAGON Software GmbH gt Paragon Pa racon Heinrich von Stephan Str 5c O 79100 Freiburg Germany Tel 49 0 761 59018201 Fax 49 0 761 59018130 Internet www paragon software com Email sales paragon software com Hard Disk Manager 14 Professional User Manual Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Contents MOUGU ON es sceecscaveuecsseaccestcacsuncdidecsiesieassuceadenscenvenessescueceesstiesesssesecesussiecssasaesevsasiacseseeseenen sess 8 What s New in Hard Disk Manager 14 ccsccscsssccscscsccccecsceccccccscsccccecscsccecccscncescecscscescececsceseececsceseececnces 8 Product COMPONENTS sicario sur 9 Re at Ul OS OVINO Mota 10 FOALS rr ina 10 User Friendly Fault Minimizing Meri aCe usada 10 A E S 10 PRES UO T OCIO a E E T E tai 11 Cony FAC PO o AP A seo 12 FAO re re ide a ia PAC estes 12 BO OE Management FACES a rn eii ce 12 Partition Hard Disk Management Faciliti cnc manada davis 12 File System OpUmizatioin Races rosca cas 13 MIO FC E e oo o A 13 AUTO mat ZO itl Sa iii 13 AA PPP A ease E E T ct ommemauces 13 Supported Data Erasure Algorithms csccscscscsccscsccccccscsccccccscsceccecscnceccececscescececncescececnceseececscesescecscesess 14 Supported Technologies sisi tt ss 14 Supported Virtualization Software sindical 15 Supported virtual hard drive typeS ssseseessseenssreessreresrrrrssrrresrrrrssrrressrerssrtressreresrtressreresrt
134. Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager 3 Inthe main window select your non bootable Windows partition on the Disk Map U Basic Disk o VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive 250 Gb a C NTFS Vista k Basic Disko Model VMware Viriual IDE Hard Drive Size 250 Gb File System Size Used Free Volume label N Volume Type Basic Disk 0 Size 250 Gb 0 E Primary NTFS 200 Gb 1 7 Gb 199 Gb Vista 1 D Primary FAT 32 49 7 Gb 24 9 Mb 49 6 Gb Mo label 4 Unhide the partition by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Unhide Create an image of partition Restore partition from image AA Volume label Copy panition ANC apy panition 199 Gb Vista 496Gb No label fe as Format Delete Wipe partition A acta Clear free space Convert 561 label Resize Move Unom Change cluster size Mod li I Retest surface 5 Only for the Windows XP Windows Vista scenario you need to make the system partition active as well by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Set Active Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 226 NTFS No label Create an image of parition ard Drive Size 40 0 Gb vo Restore partition from image AR Used Free Shh a bi i It g Copy partition iiia 18Gb 12Gb 5 4 Mb 37 0 Gb Format Linhide
135. Logs C Program Files C Program Files x86 ma ProgramData 5 System Volume Information ma Users 3 Windows Rename FG Mew folder F7 Delete F8 File name Img_DO pbf Save File type Archive files pbf Cancel lt Back Next gt Cancel 10 Edit the archive name if necessary Backup destination Archive name HDD1 Parntoi Img_O_1 pbf Space available on destination 490 GB Approximate archive size 52 8 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space O available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 11 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 143 Archive text comment Please enter backup comments to describe the archive Archive lmg_0_1 pbf created 2013 10 10 05 23 24 12 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process O This operation can also be accomplished under Windows Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition To back up required files or folders and then place the resulted image to a local mounted unmounted drive please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup O There are other ways
136. MB_ea_xU msi File 75 5 MB i C VA ewanfile eve Fila ore T To continue click Next Data size to restore less than 14 8 GB 6 On the How to Restore page specify the way the selected data will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Restore files to Original location Original location The files and tolg Specific folder lA an pour computer he place where they were archived from When restoring le Leave existing files IF a file exists in the original location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup 7 Onthe Restore Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Please overview the restore options ou can return to the coresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to Restore Object s selected 1 Total data size 71 9 MB 75 470 533 Bytes Specihied restore destination Destination path ES Space available on destination 219 4 GB 235 588 853 760 Bytes 8 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and then re
137. O 6 Select a recordable device on the list of available CD DVD devices and edit the archive name if necessary Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 133 Select a recorder to burn archive images to Mame Dic pes 2 HE CY Mar VMware IDE CDR10 CO FRAM DYD R RW DVD RAM 15 CD Burner Emulator CD R IS DVO Burner Emulator DYO A A W Archive details Archive name BPOS O13 Mo more than 6 symbols and only in English Estimated archive size 3 1 GB O Please take into account the Estimated archive size value It can give you a hint about the number of CD DVD discs required for the operation 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen 8 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to a network share please do the following For PBF images 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next bu
138. Oemsetup inf 640 Bytes 10 17 2002 7 28 08 AM FF ImageStorage 8 7 2013 10 49 00 PM H PerfLogs 7 13 2009 7 20 08 PM H Ji Program Files 8 7 2013 10 34 18 PM H Program Files x86 8 7 2013 10 29 10 PM H Users 6 26 2013 5 29 22 AM E Ja Windows 8 7 2013 11 09 06 PM i 8 CD Drive D CD_ROM E 5 Boot K File name NETD LKRT INF Files of type Inf Files O To know how to map a network share please consult the Configuring network scenario 3 Youwill be notified on the successful accomplishment of the operation Click Yes to load another driver or No to close the dialog Driver cdriversinetdlkrt inf has been loaded successfully Would you like to load another driver s O The WinPE recovery environment can either be 32 or 64 bit so are to be drivers for injection Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 261 Configuring network If your local network has a DHCP server a network connection will be automatically configured once the WinPE recovery environment has been started up Otherwise you will need to do it manually with a handy dialog by providing an IP address a network mask default gateway etc Besides with its help you can easily map network shares To manually set up a network connection and map a network share please do the following 1 Click Configure Network 2 Inthe opened dialog provide an IP address a network mask default gateway etc for
139. PC card storage devices MBR and GPT flash memory etc Getting Started In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to get the product ready to use System Requirements For the Windows installation package e Windows XP SP3 e Windows Vista e Windows 7 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 Additional requirements e To install and run the product the target OS should have Visual Studio C 2010 Runtime Library installed comes with the installation package you will be prompted to install it if it s not been found in the system Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 17 O During the installation additional free space up to 1GB will be required For the Linux bootable environment e Intel Pentium CPU or its equivalent with 300 MHz processor clock speed e 256 MB of RAM e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Keyboard e Mouse For the WinPE bootable environment e Intel Pentium III CPU or its equivalent with 1000 MHz processor clock speed e Atleast 1 GB of RAM e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Keyboard e Mouse Additional requirements e Network card to send retrieve data to from a network computer e Recordable CD DVD drive to burn data to compact discs e External USB hard drive to store data Installation Before the installation please make sure the systems requirements are met If everything is OK please do the following to install the product In case there is some previous version
140. S E 26 GB B E arc_disk3 H E arc doc H E arc Image agm arc_ ustem HE inc 171013045750652 s Ba arc spetem pbt Ar MB gt arc_ system phi BE KB 7 larc_ system ptm 7 2 kB E System Volume Information 1 2 Primary FAT 32 F 20 9 GB 1 13 Primary Ext2 Ext3 Extd Reiser 13GB 574 Primary Ext2 E xt3 Ext4 Reiser 19 2 GB H 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 7590 GE GE 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 120 GE AR virtual Drives 3 Call a context menu right click of the mouse button for a file folder you need and then select the Export item 10716 2013 3 02 11 PM 10716 2013 3 00 23 PM 10716 2013 3 00 56 PM 10716 2013 0 57 56 PM 10716 2013 0 57 56 PM 10162201 3 8 57 20 PM 10716 2013 9 59 15 PM 10716 2013 8 57 19 PM 10716 2013 8 23 03 PM Name Size Modified CN Drives EN Hard Disks 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB GH GBP Primary NTFS 350 MB gt 2 Primary NTFS C 499 6 GB Er H E Recycle Bin 9 3 2013 1 49 11 PM lf iC Jocuments and settings ifs PerfLogs E Program Files Refresh E Program Files x86 ProgramData cel E System Volume Information i E Users e Windows 4 Selecta place on the disk where the file folder Look in E Local Disk CJ i E pf 22 2013 6 45 52 AM 22 2013 2 22 35 AM 41622013 8 18 50 PM 9 3 2013 1 54 48 PM 10 16 2013 8 21 08 PM 10 16 2013 8 19 29 PM 9 3 2013 1 48 22 PM 9 3 2013 9 43 00
141. S 4996 GE 3 GB Local Disk Ly Primary NTFS 250 3GB 72 5 MB Archive Details Mame Local Disk Volume label Ho label File system NTFS Total size 499 6 GB Used space 9 7 GB Free space 489 9 GB 6 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev y Local Dis 4C z TOA Tota size 280 3 GB ke A 019 3 68 Used 60 6 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk Urree 219 6 GB 5 Backup Capsule Virtual SCS Disk Dev All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 7 Onthe Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter If you ve got to do witha 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Switch EFI to boot from destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can
142. S is set up to boot from CD USB first Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 166 2 Launch Boot Corrector 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select Correct EFl parameters to specify the required bootable device in the EFl boot entry Windows installation to comect View the list of all windows installations and correct boot parameters Correct the Master Boot Record MBR View the list of all Hard Disks and comect MBR executable code on some of them Edit View Sectors View edit backup and restore sectors or a group of sectors on the hard disk or partition of your choice E Corect boot parameters boot ini BCD Automatically correct boot ini and BCD on all hard disks in system 2 Correct EFI boot parameters enc ap AA E O The option above will be available for the user only if the operation is accomplished through the 64 bit WinPE media 5 The wizard will detect and list all available GPT partitions that accommodate 64 bit Windows OS Choose the one you need to boot from to let the wizard modify the EFl boot entry correspondingly The wizard has searched your computer for valid Windows installations You can see results of the operation below Note The status System stays for a system partition Bootable for a boot partition Curehr values Registry volume letter C Partition ID 1 Microsoft Windows 8 x64 Destination Disk 2 Partition 3 Statu
143. Used space 8 6GB Free space 8 GB 5 Specify the guest OS and a virtualization software vendor If the selected backup contains several Windows OSes our wizard will find them all and automatically patch to run in a virtual environment However we cannot guarantee smooth startup of all found Windows systems for their configuration parameters may be incompatible with each other This is why we additionally prompt you to specify what operating system you d like to use as guest to configure the virtual machine for that particular system The following 05 will be used as guest a HE Windows 8 1 Please select a virtual software vendor C VMware Workstation 7 VMware Fusion le Microsoft Virtual PC 0 Oracle VirtualBox f Oracle VirtualBox OVE virtual appliance When using old Paragon s backup images prior to Backup amp Recovery 10 please be ready O to manually specify the guest OS Not all vendors may be available to choose If capacity of one of the selected objects exceeds the maximum virtual disk capacity of any vendor this vendor will be shadowed 6 Set properties of the future virtual machine e Virtual machine version Please make sure you choose a version which is supported by your virtualization software otherwise you won t be able to work with the newly created machine e Virtual machine name By default the wizard picks the name of your guest OS which can be modified however Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Softwa
144. VSS mode enabled get the following error error code 0x12016 VSS can t read volume data Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 12 When trying to back up to a network share get the following error i o error or can t open create file Please check whether you ve got a permission to write to the selected destination or not 13 When trying to restore a backup archive get the following error Can t restore to current selection or Archive does not fit Most likely you re trying to restore a backup of the whole hard disk to a partition or vice versa 14 set up a timetable for a task but it fails to execute There can be a number of reasons for that Windows Task Scheduler does not work properly Check whether it is so or not by scheduling a simple task call Notepad through scheduling You don t have permission to write to the selected backup destination Glossary Active Partition is a partition from which an x86 based computer starts up The active partition must be a primary partition on a basic disk If you use Windows exclusively the active partition can be the same as the system volume In the DOS partitioning scheme only primary partitions can be active due to limitations of the standard bootstrap Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
145. _ USER igmail com Please enter description of encountered issue Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents 3 Browse for the required location of the log files package or manually provide a full path to it Click Save to initiate the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 265 Specify folder and file name for ZIP archive Look tr E New Volume Es l PA xK Mame a F Local Disk C H DVD Drive D S B New volume E E NEW VOLUME F File name TEST_USER gmail com 2073 08 06 23 24 zip Files of type IP archives oe O This function is also available under Windows How to Work with Bitlocked Volumes Our product allows you to accomplish a number of operations on volumes encrypted by Windows BitLocker but only when they are unlocked Until that locked volumes will be recognized in the program s interface as Not formatted You can unlock this type of volumes only through Windows native facilities e Graphical user interface for Windows e manage bde command line tool for Windows and the WinPE recovery media Let s see how to unlock a volume encrypted by BitLocker in Windows and the WinPE recovery media In Windows 1 Initially we ve got a bitlocked data volume F displayed as a volume under lock in Windows Explorer Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights
146. ace and the unused space of other partitions Undeleting Partitions When simply deleting a partition without additional wiping disk management software only removes references to it in the Partition Table thus leaving the possibility to recover it later The program enables to find and recover these partitions A restored partition will be fully functional as long as other partitions were not created moved or exceeded the disk space occupied by that partition That is why the program offers this function only for blocks of free space The operation can be accomplished with the Undelete Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Undelete Partitions There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the undelete partition operation e Free blocks to scan for lost partitions Choose a free block from a tree like list of available hard disks Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or free block you want to esamine Mame Type ER My Computer My Computer F ta B Basic MBA Hard Disk 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Internal Hard O i Unallocated Free space The summary size of fragmentis to analyze is 7 9 GB e Search method By default the wizard selects the fastest search method for your operating system In most cases t
147. ach server Besides a 64 bit kernel can access more system resources such as memory allocation per user A 64 bit processor can handle over 4 billion times more memory addresses than a 32 bit processor With these resources even a very large database can be cached in memory Although many business applications run without problems on 32 bit systems others have grown so complex that they use up the 4 GB memory limitation of a 32 bit address space With this large amount of data fewer memory resources are available to meet memory needs On a 64 bit server most queries are able to perform in the buffers available to the database Some 32 bit applications make the transition to the 64 bit environment seamlessly others do not For instance system level utilities and programs that provide direct hardware access are likely to fail Our program offers a full fledged support of the 64 bit architecture providing fault tolerant work for such system dependent modules as Hot Processing Copy Operations Hard drive duplication nowadays is becoming highly popular among PC users That is due to some definite advantages it can offer First of all many people clone hard disks just to back up data for security reasons The present day copy utilities enable to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability In case of a system malfunction
148. ads 255 Cylinders 65270 Disk and Partitions List Disk and partitions list gt AT Mo changes A Tool Button Ribbon Panel Virtual Operations Bar Express Mode Button Disk Map Disk and Partitions List Context sensitive Menu Properties Panel Status Bar OU 0 N WD Ww A W N FR A number of panels offer similar functionality with a synchronized layout The program enables to conceal some of them to simplify the interface management Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 40 Tool Button By clicking on this button the user can e Launch auxiliary wizards e Get access to the program settings e Collect and send a log files package to the Support Team e Goto Paragon s website to download a free update register the product visit Paragon s Knowledge Base etc Ribbon Panel An area across the top of the program s window is called the Ribbon Panel It makes almost all the product capabilities available to the user in a single place A Ribbon Tab is an area on the panel that contains buttons organized in groups by functionality Each button corresponds to a certain program wizard or dialog If you d like to hide all ribbon tabs click on the arrow button at the right top corner of the program window Virtual Operations Bar The program supports previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual mode of ex
149. ailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But one of your partitions has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other on disk partition please do the following 1 Inthe main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map Disk map de Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Di IL Data E Hew Volume A N 244 1 GB NTFS 234 3 GB Linux Ext Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated 499 9 GB 2 Choose a space donor partition and then call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Back Up Partition Burn Partition on F E Local Di pe E Hew Yolume des Ec 21 2 GE N amare E GE NTFS 23 Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CO OVD or BD Basic GPT Hard Disk
150. al here is the shorter the interval between increments the less data is backed up In general this type of backup is great except for one thing when you restore an incremental archive there will be processed the initial full image and all increments between which depending on the size of your backup chain may take plenty of time Anyway unlike backups the restore operation is an emergency which might not happen at all Paragon s incremental sector based archive employs an innovative technology that significantly improves the backup performance Its core is in introduction of a special index file pfi that keeps meta information on the corresponding incremental image It s much smaller than the image itself and is used to calculate the difference between the current and previous state of a backup object Thus when you re going to do an increment to a full archive of your system partition stored on the network only its index file is processed over the net a couple of megabytes at most not the entire image which minimizes both the network traffic and backup time Another new thing is change of a backup format all increments are saved in vhd Virtual Hard Drive containers Incremental Chain to a Sector Backup sunday Monday Tuesday Saturday Increment 1 Increment 2 increment n Monday restore point za Base Sector Backup Tuesday restore point A Saturday restore point II Copyright 1994 2013 Pa
151. and file archives with Volume Explorer File Transfer Wizard File Transfer Wizard is designed to make such operations as copying of separate files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible It may be of particular use in case of a system malfunction caused either by a virus attack or files corruption in order to get the system back on track again Besides it provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files Startup e Click Tool Button then select File Transfer Wizard There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Setup 117 The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the transfer operation Place to look for files directories Select a source disk from the pull down list in the left pane of the page The program enables to process both mounted and unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Besides it is possible to map a network drive Source Local Disk C a al Y B Local Disk C 5 DWD Rw Drive D a 5 New Yolunne E Local Disk F NEW VOLUME G gt Physical partitions e System Reserved Disk 0 p e NEW VOLUME Disk 2 par CN Network places CN Network Object s of operation Choose files directories you want to copy and place them
152. ansfer Files Wipe Data Delete Partition To know more on how to handle the product s interface and accomplish typical operations please consult the chapter WinPE and or Linux based recovery environments should be prepared on site with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder which you can download from Paragon s web site the My Account section To know more on the subject please consult documentation that comes with these utilities The Linux DOS recovery environment can be used to boot your computer into Linux or PTS DOS to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes It also has the PTS DOS safe mode which may help in a number of non standard situations such as interfering hardware settings or serious problems on the hardware level In this case only basic files and drivers such as hard disk drivers a monitor driver and a keyboard driver will be loaded To start working with the Linux DOS recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 20 To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up
153. aragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 253 Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 39 9GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev Unallocated 39 9 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 4 JetHash Transcend 4GB USB Device Removable Basic MBR Hard Disk 5 VMDK image Virtual Image Basic MBR Hard Disk 6 VMDK image Virtual Image PARAGON G 3 7 GB FAT32 Local Disk 499 9 GE NTFS 100 ME NTFS Local Disk 544 ME NTFS Local Disk 479 MB NTFS 4 Format Partition Delete Partition Move Resize Partition Convert File System Hide Partition Mark Partition as Active Make Partition Logical Change Cluster Size Change Serial Number Change Partition ID Test Surface Check File System Integrity Edit View Sectors Properties In case you ve got more than two partitions on the disk and the required space donor is not adjacent to the system partition you can still use this scenario by consecutively redistributing free space between all partitions involved in the operation In the opened dialog drag and drop the left edge of the partition to the right to release the required amount of the free space displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Are you sure you want to move resize volume You are about to move Tesize NTFS volume Local Disk 5 0 Basic MBR Hard D
154. ard disk and contained an OS The situation has changed however thanks to new cost effective high capacity hard drives thus opening up numerous possibilities for PC users such as editing video archiving music backing up CD images etc Huge increase in space is great but it poses a number of problems most important of which are effective data organization and speed Large drives are always going to take longer to search than smaller volumes and an operating system is going to have its work cut out both finding and organizing files It is for this reason that many people decide to invest in multiple hard drives but there is an easy solution drive partitioning Partitioning lets you divide a single physical drive into a number of logical drives each of which servers as a container with its own drive letter and volume label thus enabling the operating system to process data more efficiently Besides partitioning makes it possible to organize data so that it is easy to find and manage You can set aside for instance 40 GB of a 160 GB hard drive for the OS 70 GB for storing video and another 50 GB for your favorite music collections to provide transparent data storage It is also worth mentioning to that with a hard drive properly partitioned such routine operations as files de fragmentation or consistency check will not be that annoying and time consuming any more By detaching the OS from the rest of the data you can tackle one more crucial
155. ardware malfunction or a virus attack You can place a backup image to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence You can place a backup image to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system However it won t help you in case of a hardware malfunction You can place a backup image to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure You can place a backup image to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Moreover by storing it on a special purpose server you may be pretty sure nothing will happen to it Finally you can place a backup image to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Known Issues on FTP SFTP 1 4 You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 by default You cannot restore data selectively with Restore Wizard from an FTP SFTP server You can browse an FTP server in the passive mode only Parallel access to several FTP SFTP servers is limited only on
156. are In our case it s on a network share this is why we need to map it first Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers Add a folder to the drivers source list Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 236 Poppy Disk Drive A E E Local Disk C A Map Network Drive i 2 Network Pl Remote location mapping server pool Driver Repository Map to drive letter Z E P Make permanent connection Windows Security X Enter Network Password Enter your password to connect to server Test Domain 7 32 ENTERPRIZE E Remember my credentials EN Access is denied 11 When done we can select it as target Address ZA F Floppy Disk Drive A H E Local Disk C H ECD Drive D H Local Disk E A Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers EA OQ The wizard enables to specify several driver repositories 12 If the wizard has found all missing drivers it will ask you to confirm the operation Apply the changes to complete After the operation is completed the system will be bootable on the new hardware After the startup Windows will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices It s a standard procedure so please don t worry and prepare the latest drivers at this step to get the most out of the system Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights r
157. are two unallocated slices the maximum available for MBR 2 2TB and 750GB Basic MBR Hard Disk ame system obume Size aibhon Size Second HDD FF NTFS 238 GE 286 Hitachi HDS 23030 Basic MBR Haed Disk 1 Hitachi HDS723030ALA640 2794 5 GB Ge Unalocated 2047968 2047 9G Trees land e Unalocated 746568 74656 Status Onine F Basic MBR Haed Disk 2 ST 3160815451 149 GB ad Total size 2734 5 GB lt gt Sectors per track 63 ETE ia Al Cylinders 97451 Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 Hitachi HDS723030ALA640 Unallocated Unallocated 2047 9 GB 746 5 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 ST3160815AS i System C Applications D E Other Stuff E 295 GB NTFS 53 4 GB NTFS E 66GB NTFS vi lt E NTFS M Fara WM FATIG Lira Ext2 Linux Ext3 Liram Ext4 WD ReiserFS a 5 To get access to the entire disk space we need to convert the disk to GPT To do that select in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Convert to GPT hard disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Ww Are pou sure you d like to convert Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 Hitachi HDS 723030414640 to GPT Please Note Despite the laci that all oredick contents reman infect dunng the operation your O S may no longer boot corecti for Windows lt P 324 for mstance does not support GPT disks ve 6 Confirm the operation and then apply the pending changes 7 Now you ve got access to the entire disk space and are able to perform functions such as
158. ary partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Mark Partition as Active Inactive O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject A Are you sure you want to set the volume as active Tou are about to set the volume F No label NTFS as active If you already have active volumes this action might render pour system unbootable 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation There can only be one active partition on a hard disk otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 100 Hide Unhide Partition The program allows you to hide unhide primary and logical partitions By default an operating system does not mount hidden partitions thus preventing access to their contents In order to hide unhide a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Hide Unhide Partition O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation 1 It is strongly recommended not to hide the system partition Otherwise your operating system wil
159. ary physical disk thus opening up all functionality available for physical disks to virtual e Separate x86 and x64 installation packages Please note that started from HDM 14 installation packages do not include Recovery Media Builder thus customers can build Linux or WinPE based recovery media only through special utilities Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder obtained from Paragon s website e Windows 8 1 support Our product has been tested to work fine on Windows 8 1 RTM e New user friendly interface that is fully compatible with the Windows 8 streamlined tile oriented interface Metro style Express Launcher Ribbon based full scale launcher GUI of the Linux recovery environment has also been uplifted Product Components In order to cope with different tasks the product contains several components e Windows based set of utilities is the crucial part of the product With the help of an easy to use launcher you may find and run tasks of any complexity in the field of data and system protection hard disk partitioning and cloning etc e Linux DOS based recovery environment is a multi platform bootable media that enables to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes Both platforms have their strong sides for instance Linux can boast support of FireWire i e IEEE1394 or USB devices It enables to burn CD DVD discs However there can be some
160. asses count 1 Percentage of sectors to check 100 Approximate wipe tine 00 21 19 You can skip verfying completely or partly by disabling it or reducing percentage of sectors to check Please note it would be a deviation from US DoD 5220_22 M 7 Review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary four hard disk before the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i 7 EE i 499 9 GB 8 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Extra Scenarios for WinPE Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account Adding specific drivers The WinPE based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support Anyway you ve got the option to add drivers for specific hardware with a handy dialog To add drivers for specific hardware please do the following 1 Click Load Drivers Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 260 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for an INF file of the required driver package located on a floppy disk local disk CD DVD or a network share Then click the Open button to initiate the operation Look in Local Disk C a E E Local Disk C E Ju archive_db 8 7 2013 11 57 39 PM y Drivers 8 7 2013 11 13 10 PM fee NETOLKRT INF 94KB 9 19 2003 5 44 10 AM Network Places p eae
161. automatically select the previously chosen item of the menu Hidden mode Choose this mode not to display the boot menu until pressing a hot key For this mode you should define a hot key used to enable the Boot Manager and a time period in seconds the startup message will be displayed Boot menu options Normal mode W Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds C Hidden mode Choose a hot key for startup Booth anager e Deactivating Configuring the Boot Manager These two options will only be available once the wizard has been completed and launched again Select the Deactivate option to remove the Boot Manager from the MBR Master Boot Record or Configure to modify the previously set parameters of the startup process f Configure Choose this option to enter Settings page You will be able to configure Booth anager appearances and Boot Menu options f Deactivate Choose this option to deactivate Boothanager This will remove Booth anager and restore boot process to its previous state Result After the Boot Manager Setup Wizard is completed the program updates the original record in the MBR to get control of the booting process and to be able to display the boot menu Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Partition Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry out partitioning operations supported by the program Copyright 1994 2013 Parago
162. available W Use 0S built in format routine Please select number of sectors per cluster a Restore defaults e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 86 O Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition formatted to the specified file system Deleting Partitions Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Delete Partition O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Create Delete Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to delete Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to delete On this page you can choose
163. based archive It is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup Incremental Chain to a File Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday increment 1 increment 2 increment n Monday restore point l Base File Backup Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point o File Increment to a Sector Backup File Increment to a Sector Backup is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the sector based backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Backup Storage Our program supports several techniques of storing backup images Let s take a closer look at them all to understand what kind of storage is able to provide better security Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 28 You can place a backup image to a local partition Despite the fact that it is the most convenient way try not to use it You can delete your backup just by accident or lose it as a result of a h
164. bject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter File Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 70 Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want bo restore from Mame Type Size F FB Archive File Level Archive 589 5 KE 603 660 Bytes HM A C EJE 4 E arc 091013140825801 eM arc_091013140825801 pfi File 576 KB fe 1 arc 091013140825801 ptm File 1 5KE To continue click Next Data size to restore 589 5 KB e A place to restore From the pull down list you can choose whether to restore contents of the backup image to its original location or specify some other one Restore files to Original location The files and fold Original location b he place where they were archived from Specific folder When restoring Mes ma arean ereton pour computer f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the original location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup Besides if you select the Original location option you can additionally define whether to replace already existing files during the restore operation good for recov
165. boot the computer O This operation can also be accomplished under Windows Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 201 File Transfer Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the File Transfer Wizard please do the following 1 Call the popup menu for the required backup image right click of the mouse button in the Archive Database and then select the menu item Restore File from Archive Thus you automatically open it with the File Transfer Wizard es Show archives Show all S E Ed Ls Type Creation Date source Object Size Archive Size Flags 10112013 4 16 55 4M Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 7590 GE 5 1 GB d F 1071072013 7 18 58 AM File level Archive g 119 Bytes E 10 10 2013 7 18 24 AM Filedevel Archive EE ai peiye e iie IO 248 Bytes foe J 10102013 7 11 42 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Delete the Archive fram the Database 44 7 MB 10 10 2013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 V as 57 5 MB E 10 10 2013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 3 j u 49MB ie J 10 10 2013 6 55 43 AM File level Archive Incremental File Backup 309 Bytes A J J 10102073 6 54 26 4M File level Archive Restore File From Archive B59KB H 2 J 10102013 6 48 07 SM File level Archive IT 48MB ke 3 5 10102013 2 17 45 AM New Volume 14 2 GB 33KB HB 3 5 10102013 2 1719 AM New Volume 14 2 GB 22 MB 2 Select files you want t
166. cal Scenarios This chapter lists a number of the most frequently used scenarios that may be accomplished with the program You can find here useful recommendations and descriptions of operations Backup Scenarios Creating the Backup Capsule 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Manage Capsule 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a place on the disk where the backup capsule will be created It can be created as a primary partition or as a logical drive within an extended partition It can be inserted into any place on the hard disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 128 On this page vou can select a hard disk where a backup capsule will be created as well as the relative position of the capsule on the hard disk Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l E Local Disk C 499 4GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der p E Unallocated 749 5 GE Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Be Inallocated Ela A E a Use the buttons to mowe the marker Backup capsule will be created where the marker iz By default the program allows the user to create the backup capsule only as the last
167. ccessfully process system or archiving separate files or folders encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain It can create an exact image of a partition It enables to automatically build up contents of including its service data Thus it is ideal for a the future backup image by using an advanced backup restore of a system partition or a fast system of filters deployment to a bunch of identical computers It allows archiving data of the same volume with different backup policies It is easy and efficient when creating backup chains Demerits Resulted backup images may contain a lot of It depends on a file system structure so you redundant data won t be able to process unknown file systems It is ineffective when trying to maintain a backup It cannot be used to back up a system partition chain especially when little amount of data is being changed It is much slower when processing large amount of data Backup Types At the present moment the market is offering various types of backup imaging to meet the needs of any user Besides supporting them all our program offers a unique backup type called File Increment to a Sector Backup Full Differential and Incremental Sector Backups A full sector based backup image includes all contents of a partition or a hard disk at the moment of its creation If you roll back your system to the initial state on a regular basis that s
168. cific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 From the list of all found Windows systems if several select one you need to adjust to the new hardware If you re willing to adjust them all just re launch this wizard for each a aie O 5 There are two execution modes to choose from fully automatic and advance Below we will go set by step through the automatic scenario to show the whole process and then take a closer look at specifics of the advance scenario g Adjust the OS to the new hardware autdpatically Perform the 05 adjustment in automatic mode The wizard will automatically set parameters and inject drivers Set parameters for the OS adjustment Perform the OS adjustment in advanced mode You will be able to manually set parameters and inject drivers hd 6 Select Adjust the OS to the new hardware automatically 7 The wizard will automatically accomplish all the necessary actions Process driver AmPecivandd inf fron Windows driver repository L The only action that might be required from your side is to set a path to an additional driver repository in case the wizard has failed to find drivers for some boot critical devices in the built in Windows repository Generally together with new hardware you get its drivers for different operating systems on removable media mostly CD or DVD By collecting all these drivers in on
169. ck of the mouse button and launch the Hide Partition dialog Click the Yes button to continue r Are you sure you want to hide the partition You are about to hide partion E No label NTFS Hiding the patton may cause drive letters to be changed O Hiding of the system partition will make OS non bootable what is quite normal 9 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 10 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree After all the operations are completed you will not be able to restart the system what is quite normal Nevertheless if you do try it the following error will occur STOP 5 ror O 12 initia Ton pr s or system process terminated unexpectedly with a sta tus of i 34 Ox0010037c All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 11 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues You need a bootable distributive CD of Wind
170. ck the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name larc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 55 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space O available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another network drive needs to be selected 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive Ry No commen 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process For pVHD images 1 Click the New Backup Format tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Backup to VD Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 136 O There are other ways to start up this
171. ckup process O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive To back up a dual boot Mac Mac OS X and Windows XP Vista 7 8 and then place the resulted image to an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here WWW pPa ragon softwa re com my accou nt To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer It will be automatically started up into the Linux recovery environment Normal Mode since it s the only mode that provides support for Mac computers 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager 5 Launch the Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu of the program Wizards gt Backup Wizard Partition Wizards Help Copy Hard Disk One Button Copy Wizard d Disk O WI Backup Wizard h Restore Wizard dDiski vMy Simple Backup Restore Backup to WD Wizard Incremental Backup to WD Wizard Restore from VD Wizard d Disk 2 Wii Undelete Partitions Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard Split Partition Wizard d Disk 3 W
172. creating a volume using our program or Windows Disk Management Are pou sure you want to create a new partition on disk 1 You ae about bo create a new partition in Unallocated 2794 5 GB sea Please select size postion and fle system of the new partition Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 Hitachi HDS 723030414640 th New Volume 4 2794 5 GB NTFS Parhtion Lest Please specify new partition size 2361588 7 MB 2 861 539 MB Hame Basic MBR Hard Disk 015 Please specily size of ree space before the partition 0 OMB 2 861 579 MB Second HDD F Please specily size of hee space alter the partition 0 OMB 2 861 580 MB 5 Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 H 5 Unalocated Please select fle system for new partition NTFS 3 E Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 5 Please enter new volume labet New Volume Please specily dive letter d ka D Mas oin Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 Unallocated CAGE Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 57316081545 p System C Applications D i Other Stuff E 235 GE NTFS 534 GE NTFS 66 GB NTFS When trying to create a volume in WDM just after the conversion to GPT you will be asked to restart the computer first The system restart is not required for our program O When partitioning in WDM it additionally creates an MSR Microsoft Reserved partition which size may vary from 32MB for disks up to 16GB in size to 128MB for all the others It s a service partit
173. crosoft VSS e Switch between hot processing technologies Mark the checkbox to automatically switch between Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft VSS if one of them is unavailable at the moment O By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Run during Backup Options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 49 Run during Backup Options Run during backup options For backup operations in the Paragon Hot Processing mode you have a possibility to run external programs and commands at different stages of the backup process The key point to link such execution to i a short period of time when a snapshot is taken Snapshot is a map of used blocks the system is totally frozen for writing when it i taken Please specify executable files for each stage if necessary Execute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot Browse Execute after taking a snapshot Browse Execute after finishing the backup process Browse Change hot processing options In this section you can specify external applications to execute at various phases of the backup process It can be particularly useful when imaging systems with high availability requirements MS SQL MS Exchange etc since it enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a backup taking i
174. ction to secure utilization of an outdated hard disk In this manual you will find the answers to many of the technical questions which might arise while using the program O Our company is constantly releasing new versions and updates to its software that s why images shown in this manual may be different from what you see on your screen What s New in Hard Disk Manager 14 e Complete uEFI support Below you can find only new features introduced in this version A 64 bit Windows OS system configured to the uEFI boot mode can be adjusted to successfully start up on another hard disk during copy restore accomplished directly under Windows Previously the uEFI fixup was only available under WinPE A 64 bit Windows OS system configured to the uEFI boot mode will successfully start up in a virtual environment after P2V migration The Linux based recovery environment supports systems configured to the uEFI boot mode e Enhanced backup format Paragon introduces a pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive format a special VHD optimized for storing backups of virtual and physical machines It s very efficient in handling incremental chains data de duplication and synchronization pVHD allows obtaining backups that are up to four times smaller than original backup objects What you get by using pVHD Incremental imaging works much faster and rock stable in comparison with the old PBF Only pVHD images can be used to do immediate virtuali
175. d e Migrate OS to SSD Wizard e Boot Corrector O The uEFI switch boot device option is only available through the 64 bit WinPE media at the moment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 34 Apple Boot Camp Boot Camp is a special utility to help you set up a dual boot system Mac OS X and 32 bit Windows XP Vista on Intel based Macs It enables to securely re partition your hard disk resize an existing HFS partition to create a separate partition for Windows and then launch the installation process With Boot Camp all the necessary drivers will be at your disposal Moreover after Windows has been installed it will serve as a boot manager to choose what operating system to start up It is strongly recommended not to modify the hard disk configuration with Windows Disk 1 Manager Otherwise it may lead to unexpected consequences right up to BSOD and inability to boot in Windows XP Vista Please use our program to correctly update both MBR and GPT 64 bit Support The bulk of software today is written for a 32 bit processor It can meet the requirements of almost any end user However that is not the case when dealing with servers processing large amounts of data with complex calculations of very large numbers That is where 64 bit architecture comes into play It can boast improved scalability for business applications that enables to support more customer databases and more simultaneous users on e
176. d port 21 for FTP and 22 for SFTP by default By clicking the Connect button the provided location will be checked If ok you ll get a new item on the list named after this location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backups Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 61 Viewing Disk Properties The Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List are the main tools to get information on the properties of hard disks and partitions available in the system To know more on the subject please consult the corresponding chapters of the Interface Overview chapter Viewing Image Properties General information on backup archives can be obtained with the following tools Using the Restore Wizard e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject At first the wizard displays the Welcome page simply click the Next button at the foot of the dialog window The next page refers to Browse for Archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Browse Tor Archive show at y E ES Es Toe CeatonDate gt Soweebiet Size 1092013 10 33 47 Pe Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 500 GB EN Switch to File view m Archi
177. d the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Local Disk C ER Y Mame Size Date 2 E Local Disk C Ge arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 5 52 57 AM arc_091013131559760 10 9 2013 6 22 51 AM are_091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM MS B r 09101 3139756622 pb 47 MB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM are_091013133756622 phi SFB KB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM EL dare TOV 2 TRECE mira 1E EB 107 970017 E720 07 ki Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame New Volume E Comment No comment is available Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File C arc 0910131337566227 arc _ 0910131 33756622 pbf O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe What folders and files to back up page you can see contents of the selected partition archive Mark a checkbox opposite a file or folder to build up contents of the future incremental image Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up Mame Size Date fo ac 091013140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM f arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM arc 101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM f arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM f arc_10101309171
178. ded to use Paragon Hot Processing with active SQL Server Exchange or Oracle databases since the backup image contents may be corrupted Volume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS is designed to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Initiated by a VSS aware copy backup utility VSS creates snapshots for the selected volumes and represents them as virtual read only devices called volume shadow copies Once the shadow copies are created the copy backup utility starts processing the data while applications keep writing to original volumes Unlike Paragon Hot Processing the VSS technology provides a unique possibility to make a synchronous snapshot of multiple volumes This very feature can be particularly beneficial when backing up active SQL Server 2003 Exchange 2003 or Oracle databases located on multiple volumes the way it is recommended by Microsoft to improve the level of database performance and reliability thus providing 100 percent data consistency O To use VSS it is necessary to have a mounted 300 MB NTFS partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
179. der to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the Restore Wizard 3 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image So you should take the following steps to do that e Select Network as a backup destination Look tr E Network sl gt E CN Disk Drives l E Local Disk C Seen Ee 5 DWD Drive D gt Physical partitions wy System Reserved Disk 0 partition 1 Primary WNTFS S Backup Capsules Backup Capsule on Hard Disk O HN Network places EE Network e Mapa network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Look tr E Network bl rA gt E Mame Size Date UN Network Remote location mapping A network share E Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 177 Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access th
180. disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 1767999 10263 MB 767999 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OME Please specify size of free space after the partition 0 OMB 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 7 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree 8 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive Let s assume that your Mac fails to boot because of a hard disk malfunction But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on an external USB drive Just replace the failed disk with a new one and carry out a bare metal restore To restore a dual boot Mac from a backup image located on an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD
181. djust OS Wizard Using 2 2TB HDD as internal data storage in Windows XP As you know 2 2TB drives are out of the supported size range for the popular Windows XP system Though two new Windows versions have been released since XP it s still utilized on 51 of computers worldwide Meaning roughly half of PC users simply cannot use the new hard disk drives We can help you augment Windows XP by adding support for GPT GUID Partition Table disks thus you will be able to use all disk space on ultra high capacity drives GPT Loader enables to use all disk space of modern 2 2TB drives under Windows XP but only for storing data not for the Windows XP accommodation Only internally connected single 2 2TB drives are supported not external storages or those combined into RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks As an example we ve taken a new 3TB hard disk Disk 1 in the system As you see Windows XP detects it as a 750GB disk It s due to the fact that this operating system works only with MBR Master Boot Record disks so it cannot address disk space beyond 2 2TB limit If a drive exceeds this limit OS detects the remaining slice of space 750GB in our case only thus making the bulk of the disk space unavailable to the user Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 232 2 Computer Management El Fie Action View Window Help om em Asg 12 Computer Management Local mA System Tools Y EA
182. e 0S built in format routine Please select sectors per cluster En gt e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control O Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Format button to confirm the operation Are you sure you want to format volume FJ Tou are about to format volume F New Yolume NTFS Pour computer may no longer boot or work correctly Please select new file system gt Please enter new volume label Mew Volume w More options Mo e File system From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become
183. e folder you can let the wizard automatically pick and install only those required for your OS Select Search for drivers in a specific folder Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 235 The wizard has failed to find drivers for some devices What would you like to do Search for drivers In a specific folder Specify a local or network path to the missing drivers Ignore all missing drivers Continue to adjust the 05 without injecting the missing drivers Which devices have missing divers Click on the link at the bottom of the page to see what boot critical devices have no drivers O The wizard names all devices according to their model description not some alphanumeric code which is very convenient 9 Though you ve got the option to continue without injecting missing drivers for boot critical devices The Ignore all missing drivers option we strongly recommend you not to do it Otherwise we cannot guarantee your Windows will start up on the new hardware There are no drivers for the following devices A int 23r 1AB EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller 8 Primary IDE Channel 8 Secondary IDE Channel You have chosen to ignore these devices and continue with the OS adjustment Your OS will not start up on the new hardware if there are no drivers for boot critical devices Are pou sure pon want bo continue 10 The wizard can search for drivers on a local disk or a mapped network sh
184. e increment toa partition DackuD sata aa 190 Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk cccoocccccncnnnnncnnonacinonacinonaninonannnonacononinnonaso 192 Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD oooonnccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannccnnnncnnnnnononnnnononnnnnanancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonoss 194 Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partitiON ooccccoccnccnccnnonannnnnannnnacnnonacononananonanononacnnnnccnonananonass 196 Restoring separate files ana folders from a DACKUD iii 199 RESIZE CON OS a A A A a A ca 204 Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data cccooccccnnccnnnncnnonaninonannnonananonacanonacnnnananonaso 204 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partitiON oonccccncccnnncnnnnncnnnnacinonaninonanoso 205 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from ANY Oth rT c oocccnnncnccnncnnonanononanononannnonacnnnnccnonarinonanoss 206 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent logical partition ccconcnccnocnnnnanononanoso 209 separatine OS trom media datan gia 210 Merging a system partition with an adjacent logical partitiON oooocccoooccnnonononnnonacnnnnnanonnnnononnnonaronnonaronnonononononanonnnnns 213 Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition ooocccncconcnnnnnnnonnnnanonnnnnncnnn
185. e pVHD provided each chain contains changed data of a particular backup object s This option allows much flexibility in managing backup contents In the wizard incremental chains will be automatically associated with their base image Virtual drives archive map Please specify ether the base image or the latest increment of the required incremental chain Mame Base Image Yincrement 1 ta Aincrement 2 a Increment 3 Archive File Details Mare Increment 3 Comment Increment 3 File Backup HODO 20131029 071 3 Imc_1_0_3 nc_3 ph Type Incremental DO Container Parent Backup HDDO_20131029_0713 Backup HOOO 20131029 0773 ph Creation date 10 29 2013 8 18 76 4M Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 151 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Specify backup objects partitions or entire hard disks Mame Type File system Size Used Backup _HDDO_20131029 0713 WD Archive 11 5 GB 12 362 862 592 Bytes 4 F Basic MBR Hard Disk O Virtual Hard Disk Drive 500 GB E System Reserved Primary NTFS 350 MB 256 8 MB aid Primary NTFS 21 2GB 105GB Hex plume Primary NTFS 478 4GB 49GB Archive Details Mame Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 10 6 GB To specify increment properties click Next Data size to back up 21 2 GB O Advanced backup
186. e password for all servers is available Adaptive Restore Technology Background Windows family operating systems are notorious for their excessive sensibility to hardware especially when it turns to replacement of such a crucial device as HDD controller or motherboard actually Windows will most likely fail to boot as a result of this operation In 2008 our company came with an exclusive technology called Paragon Adaptive Restore Initially aimed at restore of Windows Vista or Server 2008 from a backup to a different hardware configuration its current realization available in the P2P Adjust OS Wizard enables to make any Windows OS since XP bootable on dissimilar hardware by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for this type of migration Technology Concept Let s take a closer look at how Paragon Adaptive Restore works Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 29 Source environment ee i lt Adjusting HAL Modifying a lt Adjusting kernel gt i 0 internal settings m we A o ON a M a a rivers for PS Modifying additional _Aeselting cPu ie Devices 7 settings parameters _7 ae Sy we a ll Injecting drivers for boot critical devices and Nits Fram the Windows Repository From additional driver repositories Destination Environment As you see successful migration of a Windows system to a different hardware p
187. e program enables to copy a partition to a block of free space which is smaller than the partition itself taking into account only actual amount of data e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 77 Your hard disk after changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Where to place a copy Please specify the size of the new partition 23962 76 MB 122 879 HEB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 4 O MB 122 803 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 3891 P O MB 122 802 MB Partition size Define the size in Mb of the copied partition Free space before Define the position in Mb of the copied partition relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any
188. e selected network share if necessary O You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Mame Size Date F pool Aiserver2 Z _ j Je Audio E2013 4 23 25 AM e 4 16 2013 12 29 46 AM Backup Storage 1041042013 12 52 24 AM j di arc 0910131 25156058 1071072013 12 51 36 4M de arc 0910131 33756622 1071072013 1 43 35 4M di diff_ 10101 3084041 587 1071072013 2 00 08 4M j arc 091013133756622 pbt 47 MB 10 9 2073 6 38 02 AM 5 arc 091013133756622 ph K ABKB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM Pot y arc 091013133756622 ptm 16 B 10 9 2073 6 38 02 AM switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Hew Volume E Comment Mo comment is available Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used space 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File ABackup Storage arc 0910131 33756622 pb 5 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore In our case it is the first partition of the disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 178 Please select one of the objectis to restore Mame Type File system Size Used F Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 WMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk D Internal Hard Disk Drive 7590 GE se Local Disk Primary NTF
189. e window you can jump to the Copy Backup Exclude Options CD DVD BD Recording Options CD DYD BD recording options Burm ever CO DWYDBO disk to the end Choose this option to allow the disk to be copied by third party tools Recording speed Maximum recording speed z Fast recording Choose this option if you have good quality disks and recorder Boot options Specity a bootable 150 image to place on CO DYO or BD along with backup data booted iso A The specified 150 image does not exist Specity how would you like to boot from CO DYO or BD Do not boot from CO OVO or BD ISO Image folder E Browse Please select a folder to place 150 images to when CO OVD or BD ISO maker i used This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during CD DVD BD burn operations e Burn every CD DVD BD to the end By default the program does not create ISO 9660 compliant burning sessions as it processes data on the fly and can only estimate the resulted session size That s why no third party tool will get access to the recorded data To tackle the issue mark the checkbox to make the program create a standard Disk at Once session It may slow down the burning process as every CD DVD BD will be recorded up to the end no matter how much actual information to contain e Recording speed The user may define how fast a CD DVD BD will be recorded minimum normal and maximum Besides there is an automatic
190. e2 png img 201 delete png g _ about_large png Amgabout_large png El E dbh _ about_small png Amgabout_small png 20D ok png po 201 delete2 png wizardspartitioningadvanced png adb_add png Total data size 8 2 KB 6 Select the Save data to local network drives item Click Next to continue There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the data Save data to physical partitions Bum the data to CD DVD or BD Select the option to save your data locally on a mounted partition with drive letter assigned or on a network share To store your data on the network you will need a mapped network drive or a mounted directory on the server You will be prompted to choose an exact location for your data later in the wizard 7 Specify the exact place to copy the data to Please select the destination path where to save the data from clipboard Look in Local Disk C ml X E Address EA O H Ji copy_2_vmware 8 24 2009 5 21 50 PM H PerfLogs 7 14 2009 7 20 08 AM H y Program Files 8 7 2013 4 56 13 PM H Program Files x86 8 7 2013 5 03 21 PM H Users 8 24 2009 5 04 05 PM E Total data size 8 2 KB Space available on destination 480 4 GB 8 Finish the wizard to accomplish the operation Copying data from a parent virtual disk to one of its snapshots Let s assume you ve got a virtual machine with several snapshots You
191. ecified files navigate through the system metadata etc In order to edit view sectors of a hard disk partition you should take the following steps 1 Selecta hard disk partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Edit View Sectors There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 125 Gar Edit sectors on Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew Current sector is 0 of 1 048 575 999 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 0 00000000 AAA AAA AAA 00000000 0000010 00000020 00000030 00000040 00000050 00000060 00000070 00000080 00000090 anood OOOO00BO OOOd00CO OOOdd0DO OOO000ED OOOO00FO 00000100 0000110 00000120 00000130 00000140 00000150 00000160 00000170 00000180 00000190 po000140 DO0001E0 nnd rra 33 06 bd el bd 7 26 FO af Ba de 55 aa ed O0 43 O0 53 6l 18 05 10 24 v4 20 be 67 65 a4 co b4 be fl 41 cl 66 BA a3 76 11 Je 75 oo fh g0 66 66 BA all O0 eb O2
192. ector for consistency Even a low level format does not actually erase the file contents for good since they can still be resurrected from their deleted state with minimal effort by using the popular today Magnetic Force Microscopy technology The only way to make sure that all the data has been erased from a hard drive is to overwrite all on disk sectors with random patterns of ones and zeros Although this sounds complex there is an easy way to do this The process of deliberately irreversibly removing or destroying the data stored on a memory device magnetic disks flash memory drives etc is generally known as Data Sanitization A device that has been sanitized has no usable residual data and even advanced forensic tools should not ever be able to recover it thus providing maximum level of security Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 36 Data Security Standards To irreversibly destroy all on disk information there have been developed a number of disk sanitizing standards They are distinguished by wiping patterns and number of passes 1 US DoD 5220 22 M US Department of Defense recommends to overwrite all addressable locations with a character its complement and then a random character Finally the target data area is to be verified US Navy standards NAVSO P 5239 26 e NAVSO P 5239 26 for RLL encoded drives At first to write the fixed value Oxffffffff to the target data area then the f
193. ecution In fact when the virtual mode is enabled the program does not accomplish operations immediately but places them on the List of Pending Operations for later execution The Virtual Operations Bar enables to manage pending operations BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Display the List of Pending Operations Launch the real execution of virtual operations Cancel all virtual operations on the List of Pending Operations Generate a script out of all pending operations Schedule pending operations Virtual mode is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operations will be executed until clicking the Apply button for confirmation thus giving a second chance to O weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation The program politely reminds the user that there are unsaved changes by showing the following window A You have unsaved changes Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 41 Express Mode Button By clicking on this button the user can switch to the express mode of operation at any time Disk Map As the name infers the Disk Map displays the layout of physical and logical disks Physical disks are represented with rectangle bars that contain small sized bars These small sized bars represent logical disks Their color depends on the file system of the appropriate partition By looking at the size of the ba
194. ed EN l go 6 On the Select Target Hard Disk page select a destination disk a hard disk to copy contents of the source disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 230 Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content will be deleted Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i ya Unallocated 334 6 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Unallocated 749 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der a 119 9 GB 1 During the operation all contents of the destination disk will be deleted On the next page of the wizard define the copy options In our case we d rather copy data with a proportional resize to occupy the entire disk If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Choose copy options that suit best your task Copy options Partitions raw copy Resize options W Remove free blocks between partitions W Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkbox to copy the hard disk in the recfor prrec nr
195. ee in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 173 Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Operation progress Copied so far 527 5 MB Read so far 582 0 MB 44 8 MB s To copy 10 0GB Write so far 582 0 MB 38 8 MB s Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 22 Time to finish 00 08 48 Restore Primary partition O disk 2 from file larc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pf1 Data writing 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a bootable DVD disc That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on CD DVD when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Insert a CD DVD disc containing the previously prepared backup image into a CD DVD drive the BIOS must be enabled to boot the system from the CD DVD device O This scenario implies that you have got a bootable archive on your CD DVD In case the backup image is stored on several CD DVD disks
196. elf MFT is similar to a FAT table in a FAT file system MBR amp 1st track of the hard disk is the Oth sector of the disk MBR Master Boot Record contains important information about the disk layout The used partitioning scheme The starting records of the Partition Table The standard bootstrap code or the initial code of boot managers disk overlay software or boot viruses Generally the Oth sector is used for similar purposes in all existing partitioning schemes The MBR capacity is not sufficient to contain sophisticated boot programs That s why the on boot software is allowed to use the entire Oth track of the disk For example boot managing utilities such as LILO GRUB and Paragon Boot Manager are located in the Oth track Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 272 Partition ID or File system ID is a file system identifier that is placed in the partition It is used to quickly detect partitions of supported types A number of operating systems completely rely on it to distinguish supported partitions Partition ID is saved in appropriate entries of the Partition Table and takes only 1 byte of space Partition Label or Volume Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector This value is used for notification purposes only It is detectable by any partitioning tool including the DOS FDISK utility Modern operating systems save it wit
197. em e Modify file system parameters make active inactive hide unhide etc e Install New OS Wizard to make a system ready to install a new operating system e Undelete Partitions Wizard to recover an accidentally deleted partition File System Optimization Facilities e MFT defragmentation and shrinking to improve performance of NTFS Wipe Facilities e Data wiping to successfully destroy all on disk information including the standard bootstrap code and other system service structures e Free space clearing to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data Automatization Facilities e Task scheduling to automate routine operations It can be particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis O Scheduling is only available for the Windows installation of the program e Scripting to make the program create a script of any set of operations you need Besides support of all operations available in the interactive mode the unattended mode provides some additional features such as conditional execution subroutines repeatable iterations disk partition properties analysis errors management etc Auxiliary Facilities e GPT Loader is a special system driver to allow use of all space of modern ultra high capacity drives larger than 2 2TB on systems that don t support it e Conversion of basic MBR disks to basic GPT to enjoy all benefits of the ne
198. engine it is possible to use unallocated space of the disk if any and unused space of existing partitions to create a new partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 94 On this page vou can choose a hard disk if several where you would like to create a new primary partition Please make sure your BIOS i set up to boot from the selected disk Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev i A E Local Disk Ts E Unallocated CASGENTES Total size 4 3 GB Used 47 1 MB Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 Y Free 4 3 GB tual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i im L 7 Local Disk 6 y New Volume H 1 5 GE 3 1 GE NTFS 3 3 GE NTFS O To avoid any possible problems the new partition will in no way be created as the first partition of the disk which already contains at least one partition And its size If there are blocks of the free space on the disk the wizard will merge them all and allocate the resulted space for a new partition in the first place If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider fou can select either a block of unallocated space of the disk or an existing partition unused space of which will be served to create a new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E Local Disk a Unallocated 4 3GB NTFS 3 6 GB New volume cur
199. ent Facilities e Basic functions for initializing partitioning and formatting hard disks create format delete Instead of the standard Windows disk tools the program supports all popular file systems e Express Create Partition Wizard to create a new partition in the most appropriate place of a hard disk format it to NTFS and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter e Split Partition Wizard helps you separate OS and data or different types of data by splitting one partition to two different partitions of the same type and file system e Merge Partitions Wizard to consolidate the disk space which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions NTFS FAT16 FAT32 into a single larger partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 13 e Redistribute Free Space Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions e Express Resize Partitions Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of a hard disk including partitions of Apple Boot Camp e NTFS hot resize upward to enlarge an NTFS partition system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work e Convert a file system FAT16 32 NTFS Apple HFS without reformatting e Mount a partition assign a drive letter of any file system type to make it available for your operating syst
200. eric code which is very convenient So you can compare the listed devices with the given hardware to make sure the wizard has analyzed your system correctly Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 238 Intel R 82 Show already supported hardware Controller Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Driver is already installed e Filter devices without drivers by clicking Unlike the automatic mode where only boot critical devices storage controllers without drivers are being reported here you can view and inject drivers for network cards as well XEM Intel Only show devices without drivers Show all devices Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device E gt T3 Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 LS Adapter SAS 3000 series 3 port with 1068 Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device e Add a driver for each device that lacks it by clicking on the device then browsing for the required location The wizard will then match the device with drivers inside the given location and
201. ering presumably corrupted files or leave them intact good for recovering accidentally deleted files Sector Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 71 Please select one of the objectis to restore Mame Type File system Size Used gt Eee E eae ce maces Internal Hard Disk Drive 120 GB 5 New Volume Primary NTFS 14 2 GB 163 8 MB ES NEW VOLUME E Primary Linus Ext 8 3 GE 281 9 MB P NEW VOLUME H Primary FATE OMB O Bytes NEW VOLUME 1 Primary FAT32 5 8 GB 4 KB Archive Details Mame Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VHware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Dis Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 120 GE To select where to restore the selected objectis click Next Data size to restore 140 GB If you select separate files or folders to restore the wizard will continue working as though you ve got to do with a file backup e A place to restore Selecting the destination please note all contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i le Y Local Disk C Eh Backup Capsule 200 3 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk
202. eserved 237 Advance scenario specifics 1 To launch the advance mode select Set parameters for the OS adjustment J Adjust the OS to the new hardware automatically Performthe OS adjustment in automatic mode The wizard will automatically set parameters and inject drivers Set parameters for the OS adjustment we Perform the OS adjustment in advanced mode You will be able to manually set parameters and inject drivers Parameters and inject dives ne _ 2 When setting additional driver repositories you can specify how to process drivers for found hardware Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers A Inject all necessary drivers from the specified driver repository Keep the latest driver version e Inject all necessary drivers Mark the checkbox to force injection of all drivers for your devices from the given driver repository s even if there are already installed drivers for some hardware Please use this option if you suspect any of the installed drivers of not matching your hardware e Keep the latest driver version Mark the checkbox to keep the latest version of drivers during the forced re injection You can use this option only when the above option is active 3 Just before the OS adjustment you can additionally e View all found hardware devices and their driver status by clicking The wizard names all devices according to their model description not some alphanum
203. essing select how many CPUs you d like to allocate for the virtual machine e Memory amount Depending on the guest OS the wizard calculates the recommended size of RAM which can be modified however Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 242 Virtual machine version Oracle VirtualBox 4 Virtual machine name Windows 7 PC CPU number 1 Memory amount 1024 MB Minimum memory size Recommended memory size YA Maximum mi mory size if taken more you could face extensive swapping 6 Set properties of the resulted virtual disk s e Virtual disk interface By default the wizard sets the most appropriate interface for each disk Anyway you ve got the option to change it to one of the supported by your guest OS Just click on a disk and then select the required interface from the pull down list But be ready to provide drivers for it on the next page Virtual disk info Interface A RIE E ee 5051 BusLogic IDE SCS BusLogic CaAlsers user Downloads wmscsi 1 2 0 4 flp Windows 7 has been found on the source partition and the disk controller type has been set to SCS BusLogic Please provide a path to an iso or flp image that contains a driver for the selected disk controller O Our program supports injection of drivers delivered in iso or flp images so you can for instance download and inject drivers for the BusLogic controller from the VMware website e Additional
204. file names from Unicode to ANSI and vice versa 1 An incorrectly chosen codepage will certainly result in corruption of non English file names e Request confirmation of settings before NTFS lt gt FAT FAT32 conversion Mark the checkbox to automatically display the local settings dialog to check and modify if necessary the default parameters before launching the convert file system operation Copy Backup Exclude Options E Exclude from Copy Backup Specity masks for files and folders that must be excluded from copybackup operations Files that contains your e mail data 9 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category wab Delete filter pab Delete filter _oab Delete filter pa Delete filter ost Delete filter _dbx Delete filter log Delete filter TZ Delete filter contact Delete filter Executable Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter Add category Change general backup options In this section the program enables to specify what data should be automatically ignored during copy and sector based backup operations You can filter certain files or folders either by the manual selection or by creating masks what is more preferable Thus you will be able to effectively manage contents of your backup images or partition hard disk copies By default there are n
205. files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 9 MWindews System HDDO Part1 Windows 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech ma System ma Systems2 ma SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Cd Tasks G Temp G ToastData 9 tracing Total data size nia Calc Rename F6 Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the archive 8 Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CDIDVD BD Choose this option ff you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select a hard disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 194 Select path mntidisk sdb Space available on destination 321 MB Total data size mla Calc 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation
206. firm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 13 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent logical partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent logical partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Redistribute Free Space O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a volume you want to expand e the system one Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 210 Choose a volume to expand Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 9 Local Disk C E New A Ne 280 3 GE NTFS 117 3 GB TONNE ON Capacity of the volume C 12 280 3 GB The
207. ftware technology that enables to run several virtual machines on one physical machine providing resources of that single computer are shared across several environments As a result one and the same physical computer can have multiple OSs and applications operating simultaneously thus opening up enormous opportunities for both business and home users exactly e Avoid underutilization of up to date powerful computers e Increase flexibility of a physical infrastructure e Provide for increased availability of hardware and applications e Cut expenses on hardware and energy e Guarantee smooth and cost saving system migration e Enjoy working with old applications you can t launch on your current PC e Take advantage of having multiple operating systems on one Windows PC including Linux Mac OS X etc e Forget about hunting for replacement of the failed hardware and many more Known Issues 1 You should install integration services e g VMware Tools on the virtual system yourself We only guarantee its smooth startup 2 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to a virtual disk you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC 3 If your system hosts several Windows OSes our program will find them all and automatically patch to run in a virtual e
208. function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select partitions or entire hard disks you d like to back up by using Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once Click Next to proceed Press Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once a Hew Votoine E 478 4 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey a Unallocated 499 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der E Unallocated a 749 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey a Unallocated 115 9 GB Change backup settings Note This option is recommended for advanced users only You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 Specify location of the resulted pVHD in the Backup destination section If you d like to save it locally either enter a full path to the target folder in the corresponding field or use the Browse button to find it Backup destination Backup location C AUsers AdministratorsDesktop dry Available space 10 GB If you re going to save the backup image on a network share or a physical partition a partition that doesn t have a drive letter in the system click on
209. g LBA where sectors are addressed continuously over the whole disk drive It is optimal for both 512B and new 4K disk drivers Inheritance Select the option to disable automatic alignment of partitions e Check FS integrity policy Accomplishment of any data sensitive operation resize move merge redistribute change cluster size etc is potential with data loss To minimize this risk it s recommended to check integrity of your file system before this type of operations despite the fact that it s quite time consuming We offer you several options to let you choose which is best for you Always Maximum protection but minimal performance The file system integrity will be checked each time it s necessary to guarantee the maximum protection for the on disk data Once Standard protection with acceptable performance The file system integrity will be checked for each volume only once just before accomplishing data sensitive operations Never No protection but maximum performance If you re not 100 sure your disk is rock solid please do not use this option e Data Loss Protection mode To guarantee safety for your information when a data sensitive operation has been abruptly interrupted as a result of a computer reset or a power outage there are several techniques that correspond to the options below Do not protect No protection but maximum performance If you re not 100 sure you re completely safe from a p
210. g new for each sector using CSPRNG cryptographically secure pseudo random number generator e Overwrite each erased sector with its complement e Overwrite each sector with a 512 byte string CSPRNG again forcefully randomized and different from the first pass and new for each sector e Fill each erased sector with OxAA value Finally the target data area is to be verified Military and government standards always require 100 percent residual data verification It is necessary to make sure that the operation has been properly accomplished Besides corrupted sectors discovered during the operation are to be logged to keep the user informed since these sectors may contain classified information The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product Anyway you ve always got the possibility to create a customized algorithm defining up to 4 wiping patterns number of passes for each wiping pattern and for the group of patterns Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 37 thus providing the maximum possible security level Scheduling The automation of operations is particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis For example developing a specific project on a day to day basis and having to make a backup every evening so as not to lose the valuable data you will really appreciate when this kind of routine operations will be carried out auto
211. ge the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to transter Object s selected 1 Total data size T E GB 6 248 732 6358 Bytes Transter destination Destination path ES Space available on destination 219 4 GB 235 588 853 760 Bytes Overwrite existing files Mo 6 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Volume Explorer To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with Volume Explorer please do the following 1 Click the Volume Explorer tab on the Ribbon Panel B Backup Restore Mew Backup Format Fartitoning Copy amp Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer amp Refresh volumes information Y Volume Explorer Apply Discard View Changes Unda Reda 5 Reload Disk Info Generate Script Save to Scheduler GF Expre LN Drives E Hard Disks 0211 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 500 GB 5 2 YMware VMware Wirtual 5 SCS Disk Device 499 9 GB 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Device 750 GB 5 4 VMware VMware Virtual S SES Disk Device 120 GB Af Virtual Drives 2 Browse for the required archive and then open it by double click of the left mouse button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 203 Name Modified w Drives AE Hard Disks EG 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 500 GB Er E 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SES Disk Device 500 GE E e Primary NTF
212. gon Software GmbH All rights reserved 66 Smart Backup Wizard Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup chapter to know more on the subject There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview Smart Backup Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the backup operation e The object to back up Click on a section you find answering to your task Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder SJ Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions E mail to create a file based backup of e mail databases accounts and address books of MS Outlook MS Express and Windows Mail Media Files to create a file based backup of all media files photo video music etc stored in the My Documents folder Documents to create a file based backup of all office documents stored in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders to create a file based backup of any files and folders If se
213. government standards may vary for your product In case you preferred to create a customized algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to define up to 4 wiping patterns number of passes for each wiping pattern and for the group of patterns The Mask spinner control allows you to set a two figure hexadecimal character value 00 by default The available range is from 00 to FF You can also choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check Wipe parameters IW Mask og a Pass count Mask 00 Pass count E ab Mask 00 Pass count Mask 00 Pass count Pass count for the group of patterns 1 alr i ak Werhy wipe results Percentage of sectors to check f e Revise your changes This page informs on all the actions to be made in the wizard in a bright graphical form Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 108 four hard disk before the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Disk C E dy data 2 224 7 GB NTFS 274 9 GB NTFS Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev N E Unallocated 499 9 GB Wizard Result After the operation is completed you can see a well informative summary page providing structurally divided in depth information on all the actions made in the wi
214. has been scheduled 10 23 2073 6 29 45 AM W Enabled 3 Inthe opened dialog window you can see two tabs General and Schedule Click the General tab to modify e Full path to the macro command program interpreter which describes the scheduled task e Command line for starting the interpreter i e the task described in macro language e Comments referring to the task e The option of enabling disabling the task By clicking the Schedule tab you can modify the task timetable In order to apply the changes you need to click the Apply button at the foot of the dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 112 Creating a Scheduled Task You can set a timetable for execution of any operation For backup and copy operations the program offers handy wizards while all the others can be scheduled with the Save to Scheduler dialog To create a scheduled task you should take the following steps 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to schedule 3 Call the Save to Scheduler dialog by clicking its icon on the Virtual Operations Bar e Schedule virtual operations All virtual operations you have made will be saved to the scheduler No operations will be Task name Scheduled Task Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task W Do not reboot if itis required Shutdown system after carving out the tasks Start the
215. hat will do to find any accidentally deleted partition However if you re under Windows XP for instance Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 92 the Conventional Search option is selected but the deleted partition you re looking for has been created with the Disk Management utility under Vista the wizard won t be able to find this partition unless you manually select the appropriate option Quick Search for Partitions Created by Vista or Later OS Moreover if the wizard still fails to find the partition you need you can select the Thorough Search option to scan every single sector in the specified search area to get the most accurate results Choose how to look for the deleted partitions f Quick search for partitions created by Vista or later 05 f Conventional search f Thorough search y Show file systems search options O To know more on the available search methods please use the context sensitive hint system e File system filter By default the wizard will search for all known file systems However by clicking on the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard you can specify only those file systems you need amp Hide file systems search options FAT and FAT S2 file systems W NTFS file systern Linus file ystems Ext Exts and Extd Apple HFS Other unlisted file system To begin search click Next e A partition to undelete if several By default the progra
216. he Ribbon Panel Scheduled Tasks 5 Ez Ele MA Backup of Local Disk C scr_231013132945163 pe AL6 29 004 a ali Edit Script Delete Task Refresh List Properties On every task you can get in depth information including e The task name e The full path to the generated script of the task e Scheduled time of launch e Statistics on the last launch e Scheduled time of the next launch e Used account information e Comments to the task To easily manage tasks the program enables to arrange them according to a certain characteristic just by clicking on the required property Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 111 O This feature can be particularly beneficial when the Scheduled Tasks list contains too many items You can also enable disable rename delete refresh or modify properties of the selected task Task Editor With the Task Editor you can easily modify properties of scheduled tasks To do that you should take the following steps 1 Select a task on the Scheduled Tasks list 2 Click the Properties button on the Scheduled Tasks list There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject General Schedule Program CAProgram Files Faragon Software progranyscripts exe Script IC Program FilesParagon Softwarescripte ser 2310131329457 63 pel Edit Browse Comments Backup
217. he new system and you do know for sure that the bulk of it won t work anyway The best way out is to virtualize your old system But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e Your hard disk has enough free space to store a virtual image of your Windows depends on the system e You ve got one of the supported virtualization software To make a virtual disk out of your current system please do the following 1 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select P2V Copy O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select objects you need to virtualize You re allowed to select any combination of hard disks and partitions but don t forget to choose your system partition Local Disk C in our case to use it as guest Otherwise the resulted virtual machine won t start up Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 241 Please specify what volumes or entire hard disks including connected virtual disks you d like to add to your virtual machine Name Type al E My Computer My Computer ml Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Driv E Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Dris Fl E Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual
218. he partition will be created here ware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev E Local Disk E 149 9 GE NTFS Use the buttons to move the marker or drag marker by mouse A new partition will be E gt created where the marker ts ol ee By default the program allows you to create a new partition only as the last primary or as O the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems Partition size There is no restriction on size of the future partition merely depending on space available on the hard disk If there is not enough free space in one block the wizard enables to redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partitions when necessary If the total amount of free Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 81 space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it Tour hard disk before the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Eh Unallocated 119 8 GE Your hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey New volume current size is 119 6 GB Min Volume Size O Bytes 1122751 ME Max Volume Size 119 8 GB reboot to c
219. hin a file system e g as a special hidden file Thus it is able to contain a relatively large amount of text in multiple languages Partitioning Scheme is a set of rules constraints and format of the on disk structures to keep information on partitions located on a hard disk There are known several partitioning schemes The most popular of them is the so called DOS partitioning scheme It was introduced by IBM and Microsoft to use multiple partitions in the disk subsystems on IBM PC compatible computers Another popular partitioning scheme is the so called Logical Disks Model LDM that originates from the UNIX mainframe systems Veritas Executive accommodates a simplified version of LDM to the Windows 2000 operating system Windows 2000 and XP support two quite different partitioning schemes the old DOS partitioning scheme and the new Dynamic Disk Management DDM The problem is that earlier versions of Windows do not support DDM In addition most hard disk utilities do not support it as well Recovery Media is a CD DVD disc a USB flash card or even a floppy disk from which you can boot for maintenance or recovery purposes Root Directory is the top level directory of a formatted logical drive to include other files and directories In modern file systems Ext2 Ext3 NTFS and even FAT32 it does not differ from other directories This is not the case for old FAT12 and FAT16 file systems Serial Number In the DOS partitioning scheme e
220. ia Creating a file increment to a full partition backup To update only files you need since the last full partition backup please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create File Complement 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any z ho E 10322075 7 08 28 AM MEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 8 ME 1 5 10322075 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 30 8 KE 1 5 10322075 6 38 00 AM Mew olume E 10 9 GB 47 ME 1 5 1032075 6 16 13M Local Disk C 477 7 GB 9 2 GE DE 1 5 10322005 5 5497 AM Local Disk C 433 5 GB 5 1 GE DE 1 Switch to File view Archive File Details Mame Local Disk C Comment No comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 15 9 GB Free space 461 7 GB File E 4arc_091013131559760 arc_091013131559760 pfi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 156 e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can fin
221. ibility to get info on hard disk geometry cluster size exact partition location etc To get properties on a partition hard disk please do the following 1 Choose a partition hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Properties There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Local Disk E Volume label No label File system NTFS Type Primary Capacity 499 6 GB 636 501 613 248 Bytes 1 047 855 104 Sectors Used by data 12 6 GB 2 13 630 279 680 Bytes 6 621 640 Sectors Free space 486 9 GB 96 B22 01 533 568 Bytes 1 021 233 464 Sectors Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 115 In the opened dialog information will be grouped according to its properties thus by clicking tabs you can get information you need Volume Explorer Volume Explorer is a special tool to browse and export contents of the local mounted unmounted volumes formatted to FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS reFS file systems Besides it enables to access Paragon backups as regular folders to explorer their contents or to retrieve certain files Click the Volume Explorer tab on the Ribbon Panel to open it EN Drives REJAS W Cs 5 5 D Br EJz POOL EN Hard Disks 1 VMware VMware Virtual SCS Disk Device 500 GB RT Primary NTFS 350 ME
222. ich can be modified however You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 for FTP and 22 for SFTP by default 6 When ready click the Connect button to check out you ve got access to the provided location If yes you ll get a new item on the list named after this location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backup At this stage you can also edit the default archive name if necessary Archive location itp master paragon software com paragon e E 4 Name Size Date e CASTRATO HiDriwe master paragon softare com E 2china 7 2nvidia E AST_Fress E Biglobe E Carbonite E Cisco f Continuum E dialogic ES Drofa Focalbeo_3 4 103 E FA Archive details Archive name larc_1 11013120552346 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive g Ry No commen 8 To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data we strongly recommend you to password protect your backup Protect archive with password Please enter a password Password E Confirm password NU Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 141 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the ba
223. ighly intelligent work algorithm the wizard requires minimal involvement in the operation thus you only need to choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition if several available which actually differ in the amount of space to allocate For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 80 The result pon will get after applying the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l li Local Disk C eri oO GE NTFS Please select the method of new partition creation f Smart Mode Use 109 3 GB to create a partition More info The number of available methods depends on your disk layout O To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard Create Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition destination Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then choose position for the future partition on the disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions On this page vou can select hard disk and the place where to create a new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der EY Local Disk 0 39 5 GE NTFS Basic T
224. igration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select P2V Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Browse for the required backup image The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E Local Disk C je HR g Name Date E Contacts 1 28 2011 12 03 34 PM E Desktop 8 7 2013 12 26 39 AM _1 E Vista 8 6 2013 11 51 26 PM Wi arc_010609223747796 PBF 6 1 2009 3 47 56 AM 8 7 2013 12 38 02 AM Files of type Archive files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Local Disk Comment No comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 8 7 GB Used space 8 6 GB Free space 8 7 GB File CUserscisco Desktop Wistasarc_010609223 47796 PBF 4 Select objects you need to virtualize You re allowed to select any combination of hard disks and partitions but don t forget to choose your system partition Local Disk C in our case to use it as guest Otherwise the resulted virtual machine won t start up Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 245 Archive Content Type Filesystem Size Used IF S Local Disk Primary NTFS 87GB 86GB Archive Details Name Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 8 GB
225. ile E arc 101013062903344 pbf To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E Local Disk C ER Y Mame Size Date E Dl arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM arc_101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM A PARA 26 768 10 9 2013 11 53 13 PM PerfLogs 8 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Files of type Archive fles Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Local Disk C Comment No comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 32GB Free space 445 6 GB File E arc 101013062903344 pbf O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 148 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive It includes a full description of properties about the partition In addition there is the possibility to modify backup settings To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate
226. in PTS DOS as well Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 171 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Please select the file with partition or hard disk image You can select image from list below on Double click Created on Archive path 2013 Oct1111 33 52 Partition palais Ee ER 2013 Oct 11 11 17 06 Partition farc_ 111013111 2013 Oct11 11 16 55 Disk farc_111013111 2013 Oct1111 16 55 Disk farc_111013111 2013 Oct 11 02 49 50 Disk Img_DO pfi Select Image HDODO Part2 arc_111013111635639 arc_11101311 6 Onthe Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Disk preview o E Volume Type File System Size Lis ed Wolume label Basic Hard Disk 3 Size 120 GB Primary NTFS 14 3 GB 164MB New Volume id Primary NTFS 8 4 GB 8 9 MB New Volume Archive details a Type Image of the hard disk Archive path fmntidisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbt Created 2013 Oct 10 Thd 04 49 39 ha To continue restore process click Next 7 Onthe next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the
227. indows XP Professional Windows 2000 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2003 2008 follow the same strategy You can have a maximum of four primary partitions one of which can be an extended partition with logical drives However these operating systems also introduce a new disk configuration type dynamic disk which must be understood to effectively configure and manage hard disks Dynamic disk is a physical disk that doesn t use partitions or logical drives Instead it contains only dynamic volumes Regardless of what format you use for the file system only Win2K computers can access dynamic volumes directly However computers that aren t running Win2K can access the dynamic volumes remotely when connected to the shared folders over the network Dynamic disks can co exist on a system with basic disks The only limitation is that you cannot mix Basic and Dynamic disks on the same hard drive There are five types of dynamic volumes simple uses free space from a single disk soanned created from free disk space that is linked together from multiple disks striped a volume the data of which is interleaved across two or more physical disks mirrored a fault tolerant volume the data of which is duplicated on two physical disks and RAID 5 volumes a fault tolerant volume the data of which is striped across an array of three or more disks With dynamic storage you can perform disk and volume management without the need to restart Windows Li
228. indows installation disc to write a standard code to your flash drive 7 When trying to back up my system the program asks to restart the computer Most likely the Hot Processing mode is disabled Please make it active in the program settings 8 When backing up a partition with the VSS Volume Shadow Copy Service mode the program throws VSS could not be started for processed volume Most likely you try to back up a FAT32 partition which is not supported by VSS Please use the Paragon Hot Processing mode instead 9 cannot back up my hard disk to an external hard drive Once started the operation is aborted with the following error Hard Disk management Error Code 0x1100a What is wrong here The problem is that the Microsoft VSS service is set as the default Hot Processing mode in the program But this service has not been started in your WindowsXP Windows2003 Vista Please start this service right click on My Computer gt Manage gt Services gt find Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service and make it active Set also to start it automatically 10 When running a backup operation with the Paragon Hot Processing mode enabled get an error error code 0x1200e Internal error during Hot Backup Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 11 When running a backup operation with the Microsoft
229. ine when the operation will be cycled That means that on exceeding these two parameters the oldest archives will be automatically overwritten if choosing the Differential type only differential images will be overwritten Maxinum disk space to store images 10000 MB e Maximum number of images to store 2 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process The operation will run according to the set timetable The resulted backup images will be placed into the specified destination a local or a network disk its features defined by the wizard Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 163 Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials To merge a full partition backup with one of its differentials thus getting a new full partition archive please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Synthetic Backup 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe Browse for Archive page you only need to specify the required differential archive The program then will automatically find its base image e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp B Ee 5 10102005 1 45 35 AM Local Disk 10 9 GB 2 0 GE 5 10322013 11 23
230. ing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 69 By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Lookin E LocalDisk C 0 el ER Name Size Date P arc 0910139125156058 1092013111727 PM Je arc 0910139131559760 10797 2013 10 37 14 PM Je arc 09101391 33756622 1079 2013 6 38 02 AM di arc 091013140817551 10710 2013 7 00 26 4M Je arc 091013140825801 1010 2073 7 00 44 4M Je arc 101013053218496 10797 2013 10 32 29 PM di arc 101013061 434390 10797 2013 11 14 51 PM di arc _ 10101 3062903344 1079 2013 11 53 11 PM Je arc 101013091536750 100102013 2 15 43 4M Je arc_ 101013091 716250 100102013 2 17 49 4M Je arc 101013140759053 1010 2073 7 08 19 AM arc_101013141139475 10 10 2013 7 11 52 AM BESE Ec 101013141139475 pbf 264 5KB 10 10 2013 7 11 52AM_ Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VHware YHware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 120 GB File E 4arc_101013141139475 arc_ 1010131411394 pbf Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons 0 To know more on the su
231. interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders Differential backup to a sector image to only archive changes since the last full sector based image thus considerably saving the backup storage space To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials Incremental backup to a sector image is a further way of optimizing the process of disk imaging Unlike differentials it may not only contain data changed since the time of creating a full sector based archive but one of its increments as well thus allowing to save more time and the backup storage Introduction of a special index file that stores backup meta information minimizes time and resources to create this type of archives Incremental backup to a file image to only archive changes since the last full or incremental file based image An incremental image is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup File backup to a sector image It is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the disk imaging backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get i
232. ion Install New OS Wizard This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Install New OS Wizard There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select the appropriate option to create a new primary partition on your hard disk ii n A A i re tn mata M TI or mm 4 Where would you like to instal an operating systen O wart to create a new pimay partition to instal OS A new partition wil be create ce of your hard disk or unused space of existing partitions tt is the most preferable way as no system or user s data wil be affected during the installation process Ae wart 10 use an wosing pamary panton to mata U5 n case creaton of a new primary partition is not possible there are already four primary partitions on the disk or mot desirable you are free to select any of istmo pemary parttions Please note that all dats on the selected partition wil be deleted f you choose to format t later in this wizard Besides make sure no operating system has already been installed on that partition 4 Onthe next page of the wizard define size of the new partition If the selected hard disk contains blocks of free space the wizard wil
233. ion which reserves space for particular needs of Microsoft You won t see it in WDM but it s available in our program You re free to delete it Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS Let s assume you had to migrate to a new hardware platform You connected your system hard disk to the brand new PC and tried to start up the operating system you do know for sure now that this operation had been doomed to failure from the very beginning With our program you can easily tackle this naughty problem Before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e Your OS is unrolled on the new computer not in a backup image To make a Windows physical system bootable on different hardware please do the following Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 234 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the P2P Adjust OS Wizard The WinPE based environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding spe
234. ion of any operation It has two categories for time settings these correspond to appropriate items in the Schedule type menu e Initiating the operation by an event One time only i e the Once item When the system starts i e the At System Startup item When the user logs on i e the At Logon item e Initiating the operation periodically i e Daily Weekly Monthly Please specify how and when would you like to pertorm the task Aun the Weekly Monthly You need to select one of the variants Depending on your choice the scheduler displays a form that enables to set a timetable Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 110 Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task W Do not reboot if reboot i required System shutdown after backup Start the task or 10709203 4 at 12004M Eyer i 4 week s ort W Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Do not run the task after 107097201 34 Speci User name and password To run the task in the log off mode please specify administering login info by following the appropriate link in the left lower corner of the page O The Shutdown System on Complete option enables to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the operation Managing Tasks All scheduled tasks are placed in a separate list which can be retrieved by clicking the Schedule tab on t
235. ion of the selected partition enter its Volume Label The current volume label is displayed above e Do not ask volume label next time Mark the option to inhibit confirmation next time you start the dialog Result By default the operation takes only a fraction of a second However the program waits until Windows completes the modification of the disk layout Advanced Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish advanced partitioning operations Merging Partitions The Merge Partitions Wizard enables to consolidate the disk space which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions or additionally separated by free blocks into a single larger partition The order in which two partitions have been chosen is important since all contents of the second selected partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition The program provides the ability to merge only NTFS FAT16 or FAT32 partitions Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Merge Partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 88 O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Adjacent partitions to merge Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to merge as the right one will be selected automa
236. is will guarantee that all included commands programs complete their execution before the batch file does This function is only available when the Hot Processing mode is enabled The program enables to set parameters for an executable file directly from the line However if the file path contains word gaps it is necessary to enclose it in quotes in order to make the program distinguish between the path and the used parameters By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot Processing Options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 51 Wipe Options ied Wipe options Default wipe method US DoD 5220 22 M x Overnvwrite all addressable locations with a character its complement then a random character and verity Here you can set a specific data erasure algorithm that will be used by default during wipe operations O The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product Wipe Report Options ie Wipe report structure options Please enter customer information to put in data sanitization reports Customer name Customer organization IF You did not provide any information in these fields the default system data will be displayed Please mark the issues to be placed im data sanitization reports W Sustem information Choose this option to put system information in report System information includes a computer name 05 and BIOS
237. isconnect it or exit the program There are several auxiliary options however that can help in particular situations Connection options Connect disk at the program start Connect disk as read only Non destructive connect e Connect disk at the program start to have the virtual disk connected automatically at every program Start e Connect disk as read only to prohibit modification of data on the virtual disk e Non destructive connect It s a special read write mode when all changes on the connected disk are being saved to a snapshot thus providing complete safety for the original disk s contents If needed this snapshot can later be merged with its parental disk by using standard tools of virtualization software vendor Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 252 If choosing connection in the read only mode the non destructive connection will be disabled and vice versa O Since snapshots of Oracle VirtualBox are not supported the non destructive connection is unavailable for vdi disks 4 Click Connect to accomplish the operation The selected virtual disk will be available on the disk map as if it s an ordinary physical disk Limitations e Avirtual disk opened for writing with a 3 party tool e g being used by a virtual machine won t be connected as asynchronous parallel writing to the disk file will most likely result in data corruption e Avirtual disk opened for reading wi
238. isk A View the list of all hard disks and convert chosen one to virtual disk H Convert archive to virtual disk C Choose pbf image and convert it to virtual disk 4 Specify a virtualization software vendor and a number of additional parameters including e Type of the virtual disk You can either create an IDE or a SCSI virtual disk relevant for VMware only e Create a split disk You can choose whether to automatically cut the resulted virtual image to files of 2 GBs or not available for VMware only Pre allocate all disk space You can choose whether to pre allocate all space of the future virtual disk or do it dynamically not available for VMware ESX and Oracle VirtualBox Select your virtualization software a VMware Workstation VMware Fusion 1 024 MB gt IDE A 1 Create a split disk C Pre allocate all disk space 6 Microsoft Virtual PC 6 Oracle VirtualBox 5 Specify a file name for the resulted virtual disk and its location File name for the virtual disk CNM virtual disk Mare virtual hard disk mdk Browse a The virtual disk will take about 256 KB on Local Disk C There will be still 489 7 GB of free space on the volume after creating the file a 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Making Windows Vista 7 backup bootable on virtual hardware P2V Adjust OS As you probably know Windows Vista and later operating systems from Microsoft include a built in disas
239. isk C E arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 11 17 27 PM arc 091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM arc 091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM arc 091013140817551 10 9 2013 11 08 51 Ph arc_091013140825801 10 10 2013 6 51 48 AM arc_101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 Ph arc_101013061434390 104942013 11 14 51 PM arc_101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM are_101013091536750 10 10 2019 2 15 43 AM are_101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM dit 101013091744875 10 10 2013 2 17 52 AM fe ciit_1010713091 744875 pb SB KB 10 10 2013 2 17 52 AM a diff 101013091 744875 pfm 31KB 10 10 2013 2 17 524M T Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Hew Volume G Comment No comment Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 14 2 GB Used space 1638 MB Free space 14 1 GB File C farc_101073097 716250 401 101013091 744875 pbf O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the How to Restore page specify the way your archive will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Restore files to Original location The files and fold Original location h he place where they were archived from Specific folder When restoring MES ma arean Exist on pour computer le Leave existing files IF a file exists in the origi
240. isk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Hew Volume E go NTFS Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 21 fe 10835 MB 21721 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition E OME Please specify size of free space after the partition 0 OMB Partition Restore Options 8 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later What would you like to do Restore now Restore specified objects after completing the wizard Y Generate script Create a script to restore the pecified objects later 9 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 11 After completing the operation please reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a local drive Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble after having installed brand new software But you ve got a backup of the system partition on a local disk That s just eno
241. isk 6 VMDK image Virtual Image i Unallocated i 215 9 MB 2eqme 9MB 479MB Free space before 215 MB j O bytes 469 MB Free space after 0 Bytes 2 y Obytes 468 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that dont contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but will require more time Local Disk 264 MB NTFS Volume size 5 Now you ve got a block of free space to add to the system partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 254 Disk map Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive ATA Devi Unallocated 39 9 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev System Reserved Local Disk C 100 MB NTFS 499 9 GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev New Volume 39 9GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev i Unallocated 39 9 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 6 VMDK image Virtual Image New Volume Unallocated i New Volume 479 MB NTFS 196 MB 348 MB NTFS Total size 196 MB Used 0 Bytes Free 196 MB 6 Right click on the system partition then select Move Resize Partition Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev New Volume 35 9 GB NTFS Format Partition Delete Partition Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware ove EA Unal
242. itLocker will be detected as Unknown If having several bitlocked volumes just our case you can pinpoint the required volume by its size Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 268 om xAwindows SYSTEM32 cmd exe ca Microsoft DiskPart version 6 2 Y200 E Copyright iC 1999 2012 Microsoft Corporation On computer AININT IQCGNS9 Volume GH Ltr Uo lume E LD _ROM DES DVD ROM Volume 1 de System Rese ES Volume 2 E Volume 3 i Unkno Press any key to continue t Healthy Partition 35 Healthy art ition 3 Healthy Partition Healthy he If going to the main launcher of our program right now Open Advanced Interface you can see all unknown volumes detected as Not formatted just like it was under Windows Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev p System Reserved C Local Disk E 350 MB NTFS A AAA eS 19 6 GB Not formatted Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Local Disk D Unallocated 19 5GB Not formatted 404GB X O Drive letters in Windows and WinPE may differ so please do not use them as identifiers 4 Close the dialog then select Unlock Encrypted Volumes Use provided examples and grammar to unlock the required volume If you d like to see all commands of the manage bde tool please run it with the help parameter manage bde help Administrator X windows SYSTEM32 cmd exe S
243. ive on copy restore source partition This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during copy and backup operations e HDD raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy back up a hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation e Partition raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy a partition in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation e Skip OS auxiliary files Mark the checkbox to skip OS auxiliary files like pagefile sys hiberfil sys etc thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Skip archive files stored in archive library Mark the checkbox to skip backup images registered in the archive database thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Automatic BCD Update Unmark the checkbox to suppress automatic update of BCD Boot Configuration Data after copy restore operations Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 47 By clicking the link at the bottom of th
244. ives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to 8 Burn data to CDIDVD BD Choose this option f you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 8 Onthe Choose a Recorder page select a recorder from the list of available devices and then set a volume label by entering it in the appropriate field Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 196 Select a recorder to burn data to Vendor Product Type NECVMWar VMware IDE CDR10 CD R CD RW C Paragon CD Burner Emulator CD R CD RW Paragon DVD Burner Emulator DYD R DVD EF lt gt Volume label My Data 9 Onthe Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list a Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so far 0 02 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 00 Time to finish 00 00 00 Creating compilation image Used burner VMware IDE CDR10 Vendor NECVMWar Quick media erasing it may take about a minute Session opening Data burning 11 After the operation i
245. ixed value Ox27ffffff and then random values Finally the target data area is to be verified e NAVSO P 5239 26 for MFM encoded drives At first to write the fixed value Oxffffffff to the target data area then the fixed value Oxbfffffff and then random values Finally the target data area is to be verified British HMG Infosec Standard No 5 At first to write a single character pattern then its complement and then a random character Finally the target data area is to be verified German VSItR Standard Overwrite the deleted information 7 times consistently filling it with the following patterns 0x00 OxFF Ox00 OxFF 0x00 OxFF OxAA Finally the target data area is to be verified Australian ASCI 33 Overwrite with a character C then verify Overwrite with C the first pass character s inverse then verify again Overwrite everything with both C and C once again but without verification Fill everything with random characters Russian GOST R 50739 95 Destroy information by a single pass with writing random characters into each sector byte Peter Gutmann s algorithm A whopping 35 passes with 27 random order passes using specific patterns combined with eight passes using random patterns Bruce Schneier s algorithm Two passes of specific patterns followed by five passes using a cryptographically secure pseudo random sequence Paragon s algorithm e Overwrite each sector with a forcefully randomized 512 byte strin
246. k 0 Partition O boot loader timeout 30 default multi Odisk O rdisk O partition WwiNDOWS operating systems multiiMdiskiMrdiskiM panition UWINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute Capy Inger Ale Delete Edit Insert the sample Add the sample 7 Ifthe Boot ini file does not contain any mistake please return to the Correct Windows Installations page to correct drive letters in the Windows System Registry Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 169 Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status S refers to a system partition you can edit the Bootini file B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry MN Partition Status Root System 1 DiskO PartitionO S B WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform Properties 8 Correct drive letters in the System Registry Edit the Boot ini file Correct partition boot record _ Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 8 On the next page choose a hard disk from the pull down list if several then the required partition If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Partitions List Letters Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions
247. king into account only the amount of actual data of the image Paragon Smart Partition technology to securely perform hard disk partitioning operations of any complexity Paragon BTE technology to set tasks for execution during the system restart thus saving from the need to use a bootable media when modifying system partitions Paragon VIM Virtual Image Management technology that enables Paragon products work with virtual disks as though they are physical hard disks Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Microsoft Dynamic Disk simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 5 to offer more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup GUID Partition Table GPT It is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR GPT disks are now supported by Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Mac OS X and Linux Supported Virtualization Software For direct access to
248. l 5 SCSI Disk Dev A Local Disk C i New Volume E 260 3 GE NTFS 219 3 GE NTFS If you ve got more than two partitions on your hard disk and a partition you need to O increase is surrounded by other partitions you ve got the choice to choose which partition will act as a space donor Just click on the left partition of the pair as the right one will be selected automatically 4 Increase size of the system partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Please specify new sizes of selected partitions Selected part of Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Dis a New Yolume F E 422 9 GB NTFS Lett volume size Right volume size 70946 MB ME k 433052 MB 4 MB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 206 5 On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree 7 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a det
249. l automatically merge them all and allocate the resulted space to create the partition If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition thus resizing it You can select ether a block cf unallocated space of the disk or an existing partition unused space of which w De serves to create a new partion Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev y Vista C 9 Unallocated 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2 GB i New volume current size is 341 2 GB Min Volume Size 0 Bytes Max Volume Size 241 2GB 5 The next page enables to specify a file system and a number of additional parameters Since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue Yas want to formal the partition Partition type NTFS r Assign the following drive letter E Surface test level None Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 220 O On this page you can specify a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 6 Enter a label for the future partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels wil be displayed in the Boot Manager s startup menu to help you boot the required operating system OS labe Vitindows xP 7 The program will carry out all the necessary operations and then automatically re
250. l fail to boot Set Label of a Partition The Partition Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector It is detectable by any partitioning tool and is used for notification purposes only In order to change a partition label you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Volume Label There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Entera label for the selected partition NV Are you sure you want to change label an volume Fy Please specify a volume label for easier recognition of your volume Please enter new volume label New olurne e ve 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Partition ID Partition ID is a file system identifier It is saved in the Partition Table and is used to quickly detect a partition of the supported type By manually changing its value you can manipulate accessibility of partitions In order to change a partition ID you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 101 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Partition ID O There are other ways to s
251. latform involves several actions 1 Change of the Windows kernel settings according to the new configuration The program detects the given hardware profile and automatically installs the appropriate Windows HAL and kernel 2 Installation of drivers for boot critical devices The program detects those without drivers and automatically tries to install lacking drivers from the built in Windows repository If there s no driver in the repository it prompts the user to set a path to an additional driver repository strongly recommending not to proceed until all drivers for the found boot critical devices are installed In case drivers for these devices are installed but disabled they will be enabled 3 Installation of drivers for a PS 2 mouse and keyboard This action will only be accomplished for Windows XP Server 2003 4 Installation of drivers for network cards The program detects those without drivers and automatically tries to install lacking drivers from the built in Windows repository If there s no driver in the repository it prompts the user to set a path to an additional driver repository These actions guarantee a Windows system will start up on dissimilar hardware After the startup Windows will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices It s a standard procedure so please don t worry and prepare the latest drivers at this step to get the most out of the system additional drivers when dealing with Windows XP Se
252. lecting Disk or Partitions or Other Files and Folders you will need to specify more exactly the object of operation To know more on the subject please consult the Backup Scenarios chapter e Name and location of the resulted image Provide a file name for the new image and its exact location The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway be modified Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 67 Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location E arc_test me Y A Mame size Date Ef My Computer a E Local Disk C New Yolume E F NEW VOLUME F H RecovenMedia l l UN Network Archive details Archive name larc_tes Estimated archive size 2 HB Space available on backup destination 92 4 GB The program automatically calculates size of the future archive and informs the user about space available on the selected destination e Archive Comment You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No comment Result After the backup operation is completed you receive an image of the selected object This image is placed into the s
253. located Convert File System toa Change Volume Label Basic MBR Hard Disk 4 JetFlash Transcem ON Mark Partition as Active a PARAGON G as 3 7 GB FAT32 Change Cluster Size Basic MBR Hard Disk 5 VMDK image Vit Change Serial Number Change Partition ID 100 MB NTFS Test Surface Y5 Check File System Integrity Basic MBR Hard Disk 6 VMDK image Vit git View Sectors Local Disk Properties ocal Disk 479 MB NTFS 544 MB NTFS 7 Inthe opened dialog shift the right edge of the partition to the right end thus increasing its size Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 255 Are you sure you want to move resize volume You are about to moveyresize NTFS volume Local Disk Basic MBR Hard Disk 5 VMDK image Virtual Image E Local Disk 1023 MB NTFS Volume size 1 023 MB 9 MB 1 023 MB Free space before 0 Bytes a 0 bytes 1 013 MB Free space after 0 Bytes a O bytes 1 012 MB Sectorto sector move Select this option to move partition areas that dont contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but will require more time 8 Apply all introduced changes By default the program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 9 When done either di
254. lowing limitations e Archives can be mounted at the partition level only thus please use the Show partitions option to view all partitions inside backup images e Archives will only be mounted for the current session and won t be available after the system restart e Archives containing Windows Storage Spaces are not supported e Archives containing ReFS partitions are not supported e pVHD archives located on physical unmounted partitions or in the backup capsule cannot be mounted e pVHD encrypted archives are not supported e pVHD LVM LDM archives are not supported In order to mount an archive you should take the following steps 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Mount the Selected Archive There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected backup image Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 120 Car Assign a drive letter This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assignment is Mok recommended if the volume contains a file system not supported by your operating system Assign the following drive letter Sz
255. lt you ll get two virtual machines containing the same virtual environment but of different vendors You can now delete the original to release some free space Migrating from a virtual environment to physical V2P Let s assume your desktop PC was damaged a couple of months ago Luckily you had had its system virtualized just before the tragedy Having a laptop at the disposal you kept working with the desktop system in a virtual environment for a while while scanning the market for a replace To cut it short you ve got a brand new desktop PC just delivered to your door it s time for a little V2P operation Our program can help you do that Before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e You ve got access to the virtual disk from your desktop PC You can have it locally on external storage or a network share To migrate from a virtual environment to physical please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE media 2 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 3 Copy the connected virtual disk to your physical disk just the way it s done with physical disks 4 Right click on the virtual disk then select Disconnect Virtual Disk 5 Complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Migrating a Windows 7 vhd Let s assume you need to make your Windows 7 contained in a vhd file start up on another computer Yo
256. lted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Unallocated Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 46041 11 MB 99684 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 0 MB 53642 MB Please specify size of free space after the partitions 53642 H 0 MB 53642 MB 7 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 8 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and copy it to another hard disk when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Connect the second hard disk to the computer 2 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an
257. lue Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Please specify new sizes of selected partitions Selected part of Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Dis E o New Yolume F MA 259 3 GB NTFS Lett volume size Right volume size 246381 MB 2 ME ME 2 MB On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree 7 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 219 Creating Dual Boot Systems Windows Vista Windows XP Most likely you have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To install the second operating system you need to repartition your drive first as it requires a separate primary partit
258. m Pinging www google com 1 73 194 71 103 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 173 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 41ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 20ms TTL 1 28 Reply from 173 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 18ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 24ms TTL 128 Ping statistics for 173 194 71 103 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 18ms Maxdmum 4ms Average 0ms ping www google com done e Ping the specified host until stopped Mark the option to ping the chosen host for indefinite time e Resolve addresses to hostnames Mark the option to display hostnames instead of IP addresses e Number of echo requests to send By default the utility sends 4 echo requests which you can modify however 2 If you need to trace a route to some network host please select Trace route then type in the required IP address or its name Click Start when ready Utility Ping Target Enter IP address or host name Ping the specified host until stopped Resolve addresses to hostnames Clear output Number of echo requests to send 1 z Start Load from file Save to file o ox Apply Cancel Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 264 e Do not resolve addresses to hostnames Mark the option to display IP addresses instead of hostnames e Maximum number of hops to search for target By
259. m searches records of any deleted partition ever existed on the selected block of free space So you can get several partitions to choose from Search deleted partitions from sector OxUOOOU00000000801 to sector Ox0000000000 rt rrr CC AAN The following partitions have been found File system Type Capacity Used Space E Used GntTrs Primary 7 9 GB 35 9 ME O Most likely the required partition will be found first If so you may abort the search operation by pressing the Stop search button Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 93 Installing a New Operating System Getting your computer ready to install a new operating system especially when it is going to be an additional OS in the system is a rather complicated task that implies quite a number of operations from allocating space to create a new partition resize redistribution of free space to formatting of the newly created partition to a particular file system and checking its surface for bad sectors to avoid possible data loss Operating systems today are being supplied with basic tools of partitioning that only enable to create a partition in case there is enough unallocated space on the disk and then format it to the specified file system type Our program offers a handy Install New OS Wizard to easily carry out all the necessary operations to install a new opera
260. matically without your participation Another aspect of any automation process is that it allows an optimization of your computer s work load This is especially important when operations require a considerable amount of computer resources processor time memory and more A number of tasks which can decrease the performance can be run during the night or whenever the computer has the least work load to perform The program has a special tool for scheduling You can set out a timetable for any operation and it will start at a specified time without interrupting your current activity Windows BitLocker BitLocker is a security feature that enables to protect data of your volumes with 128 256 bit AES Advanced Encryption Standard encryption It has first appeared in Windows Vista Enterprise and Vista Ultimate to protect contents of hard disks from offline attacks for instance when your hard disk is stolen and connected to another computer to retrieve data it contains Our product enables to work with volumes encrypted by BitLocker but only when they are unlocked Until that locked volumes will be recognized in the program s interface as Not formatted You can unlock this type of volumes only through Windows native facilities e Graphical user interface for Windows e manage bde command line tool for Windows and the WinPE recovery media To know more on the subject please consult the How to Work with Bitlocked Volumes chapter I
261. me G 14 2 GB 10102013 2 17 79 4M New Volume 14 2 GB 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk E 477 7 GB E 1032003 11 24 19 PM File level Archive 24 KB 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 1079 2013 11 1518 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 309 Bytes 49 KB 165 5 MB 1079 2013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes 10322075 7 08 28 AM NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 8 ME 104322075 7 08 20 AM Local Disk a ME 30 8 KE 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM Mew Wolume E 10 9 GE 47 ME AO OD Oo 0 d p F E E E p F p p E E E Pa Switch to File view Archive File Details 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Archive size 309 Bytes Total size Backup date 10 10 2073 6 55 43 4M Comment Mo comment is available File E arc 09101314081 75574 farchive phi Base archive 087 7551 arc 10101 3060839749 F LOOOO00000000000000 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 189 Look in El Local Disk C al E Mame Size Date de 2 E Local D
262. me consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Convert button to confirm the operation Gar Are you sure you Want to convert system volume 2 Ad You are about to convert file system on volume C No label NTFS our computer map no longer boot or work correctly Please select new file system FAT se Select new cluster size fe hora te e New file system From the pull down list choose a file system you would like to convert to Actually the program only displays variants available for the operation taking into account the current parameters of the selected partition and limitations of the used file system e New cluster size Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance In a nutshell larger clusters waste more space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with it The cluster size value is expressed in sectors per cluster To get it in Kbytes please divide it into half You may only decrease the current cluster size e Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 98 Changing Cluster
263. mic DISKS cuina RA a 32 GPE Versus MBR cria A A AAA A A AA AA Aca 33 UEFI BOOt Calend A AE A AAA is 33 Apple Boot CaM Dientes 34 GA DIT SUD DON amarillo lc 34 COPY Ope ratio MS iia ada 34 Drive Partition cai a 35 Data Sanitat OM sss n a a uiediaesenndauuedesessiwenaaeses Ea 35 Data Security Standards iia ld 36 SCMEGUINAS ra 37 WINCOWS BITLOCKER nido OO uses onsen scevenseenanuostaneuanensnaaadaesereasaceesuospanavanes 37 Windows COMPONENTS iii aia 38 AO AP o EE dau teds Uoumeeansetewecaeseates 38 General Lao Ub asar 38 TOBIN e os a to o o e te Cal acts Rta eto Fae 40 RIOD OM Panel a NA 40 VIIa Operations Da o 40 EXPRESS MO ABU o td 41 EI Po o o E A wetpact ie buare ae scaaeunnuaeee ci eanctenatmeuray 41 Diskand Partitions AAA e e A ameest Sieve desir odex 41 CONTEXE SENSITIVE Men s areren aae sate a a ces eebhesa deus ele ees es and hee ee abe e 42 Properes Panini didos 43 AUS tte ates eset 44 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved SOLUINES OVINA 44 Genera tOdO teasers 44 Backup imace OPUS oie 45 General Copy and Back UP OPIO SS E AE AAA 46 CD DVD BD Recorra dois ci tas 47 HOUPPOCESSING ODIO Saca 48 RUN d ring Backup OPINAS a llo sans 49 WIDE OPIO Sai mausecssentaceay 51 MUS HRD Op HON cr AS cosa 51 Partition IAS OBLOA Sii iaa rios ica a 52 E Mail OU INS 2 a A AA A a 52 Operation Dependencr Opos di adds 53 A oa ico eemennr en nne ene nt SeCR MONEE CRUE eR ET EN ORE eo nee ae en eee ena een en ere Ty
264. mitations e Dynamic disks are not supported on portable computers e Dynamic disks are not supported on Windows XP Home Edition based computers e You cannot create mirrored volumes or RAID 5 volumes on Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional or Windows XP 64 Bit Edition based computers Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 33 Thus the dynamic disk is a new way of looking at hard disk configuration Dynamic disks offer you more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic disks can contain an unlimited number of volumes but they cannot contain partitions or logical drives Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup GPT versus MBR GUID Partition Table GPT is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR Being a part of the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI standard proposed by Intel to replace the outdated PC BIOS it offers a number of crucial benefits e Upto 128 primary partitions for the Windows implementation only 4 in MBR e The maximum allowed partition size is 18 exabytes only 2 terabytes in MBR e More reliable thanks to replication and cyclic redundancy check CRC protection of the partition table e Awell defined and fully self identifying partition format data critical to the platform operation
265. mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as welll This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation O The Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive option will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process 8 On the Revise Copy Results page review all parameters of the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 231 Original hard disk Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Hard disk copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Local Disk 7496 GB NTFS Proportional resize the copy will take 750 GB 100 of target disk space Min Copy Size 10 8 GB Mes Cop Sizes 75066 qa Select the range of the disk space that will be occupied on the destination disk with copied partitions 9 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 10 When copying is completed shut down the computer 11 Disconnect physically the source hard disk 12 Boot the computer from the destination hard disk To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P A
266. n Software GmbH All rights reserved 79 Basic Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish basic partitioning operations create format delete Creating Partitions The program provides the ability to create a new partition within a block of un partitioned space Restrictions 1 Do not use the Create Partition function in order to undelete the last deleted partition 2 The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free space on an existing partition to a new partition 3 The program cannot create new partitions on Dynamic Disks Express Create Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Create There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Create Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Dialog Startup 1 Select a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Create Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Express Create Partition Wizard Setup Thanks to a h
267. n from the list you can open a set of options O To get a detailed description to any setting control or field of the program just click the hint button and then the object you need General Options KR General options Partition Alignment Mode Vista Align partitions according to the rules used in Windows Vista and later OSes Check FS integrity policy Once Standard protection from data loss with acceptable performance The file system integrity will be checked for each volume only once just before accomplishing data sensitive operations Data Loss Protection mode Reset Medium protection from data loss This section contains a set of general options that will be taken into account during any operation carried out with the program e Partition Alignment mode There are three options you can choose from Legacy DOS and Windows OSes before Vista required that partitions had to be aligned to the disk cylinder or 63 sectors to address and access sectors correctly It was OK until 4K hard drives came into scene When partitions are aligned this way on this type of disk each logical cluster is linked to two physical 4K clusters thus resulting in a double read write operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 45 Vista Since Windows Vista operating systems do not use the archaic CHS cylinder head sector addressing scheme but the Logical Block Addressin
268. n the current version of our product the following operations are allowed to accomplish on volumes encrypted by BitLocker e Backup Partition e Restore Partition e Copy Partition e Delete Partition e Change Volume Label e Add Remove Drive Letter e Hide Unhide Partition e Mark Partition as Active Inactive e Change Serial Number e Change Partition ID e Test Surface e Check File System Integrity Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 38 e Properties Windows Components In the given section you can find all the information necessary to successfully work with the Windows version of the product Interface Overview This chapter introduces the graphical interface of the program The design of the interface precludes any mistake being made on the part of the user Most operations are performed through the system of wizards Buttons and menus are accompanied by easy understandable icons Nevertheless any problems that might occur while managing the program can be tackled by reading this very chapter General Layout When you start the program the first component that is displayed is called the Launcher It enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration The Launcher s window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994
269. n to close Boot Corrector 7 Restart the computer Fixing Windows startup ability Let s assume that due to an unknown reason your Windows fails to complete the startup procedure At first everything seems quite OK you can see the standard startup messages on the screen but at some moment it hangs up To fix your Windows startup ability please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here WWW Pa ragon softwa re com my accou nt To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 168 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Boot C
270. nal location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup 5 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 6 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 190 Restoring a file increment to a partition backup Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble because of a virus attack But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a local disk Besides you make file increments of your documents and e mail database to that backup ona regular basis That s just enough to easily roll everything back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition with a file increment from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment archive to your system partition backup e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a lis
271. need to copy some data from a parent image to one of its snapshots You can t just roll back to the parent image as you don t want to lose the latest data of the snapshot so the best way out is to copy the required data from the parent image to the snapshot To copy data from a parent image to one of its snapshots please do the following 1 Connect the required snapshot disk to our program 2 Connect its parent disk to our program It Il be connected for reading only Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 257 3 Copy the required data from the parent disk to the snapshot 4 Disconnect the virtual disks or close the program Migrating from one virtual environment to another V2V Let s assume you re willing to shift to another virtualization software vendor e g from Microsoft Virtual PC to VMware Workstation The only thing that holds you back from it is a lot of virtual machines of MS Virtual PC which are not fully compatible with VMware Workstation Don t worry we can help you out Before you start please make sure you ve got enough free space to accomplish the operation To make a virtual machine of one vendor out of an existing virtual machine of another vendor please do the following 1 Connect all virtual disks of the required virtual machine to our program 2 Complete the P2V Copy Wizard Do not forget to select all virtual disks as objects of virtualization As a resu
272. nerated e mail message to the address you ve specified in User e mail address field Specify e mail notification options Send E Mail notification on apply To Enter an e mail address here Send mall in HTML format Send complete report after applying operations Send graphical view of the disk sub pstem before and after apply erations wou Would like to be notified about This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during the Send log files and Send e mail notification operations e Outgoing mail server SMTP To send messages by using the built in mail client it is necessary to have access to a computer running an SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server All outgoing messages are first sent to the Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 53 SMTP server which in its turn delivers them to the required recipients The address may be represented as a traditional Internet host name e g mail com or as an IP numeric address e g XxX xXX XXX XX e User e mail address Specify an e mail address that has been assigned by the Internet Service Provider or organization s e mail administrator e My outgoing server requires authentication Activate the option to allow the program to make authentication on the server before sending messages User name Enter the name that will be used to log in to the e mail account Password Enter the password that will be used
273. nformation is structurally divided besides there is the possibility to see the disk layout before and after an operation what is very convenient In order to view logs on carried out operations click Tool Button then select View Log Files Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved a amp BR Sessions Session operations Session event Show Source gt launcher exe Operation parameters Started 10 24 2013 at 7 06 32 AM Ze Applying at 7 30 34 AM 127 b Mount Unmount partition virtual succeeded Start time 07 14 31 Type of operation Virtual Result Succeeded Show Source Operation parameters Create partition committed succeeded Total 6 operations 3 virtual and 3 committed Warning This session did not finished correctly Most probably the program was abnormally terminated Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl E i Local Disk C NTFS NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk E a 3 j Unallocated NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl cd Unallocated Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl E S E Local Disk C NTFS NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk E 5 E New Volume E NTFS NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl g Unallocated Typi
274. ng data between physical and virtual environments oocccnccncccnncnnccnnnnanonnnoncnnnonaronnonononnnonaronnonarnnnonanonnnonaronnnnos 255 Copying data from a parent virtual disk to ONE Of its SNMAPSHOTS ooccccconccnnncnaccnnnnanonnnnnncnnnnononnnonanonnonanonnnnnncnnnonarcnnonanonnos 256 Migrating from one virtual environment to another V2V ccccccccsssseccccceseccccceeeseecceseeeseceesseeeseceeeseueneceseseeeseceessageneeess 257 Migrating from a virtual environment to physical V2P oonccccnccnoccnnnnnnnnocnnnnononaconnnononoconononanoconononanoronnnonanancnnnnnnanoss 257 Migrating a WINAOWS7 VINO A A A A AAA E AE 257 Hard Disk UUINZATION dd ia ai acacia 258 Extra Scenarios Tor WINPE APA 259 PONE SIDECIN IC Over atada dci 259 contieurne NECWOMK sd cit acon ccd A A a tlh lA tailed et Lia alae dad at acd 261 SAVING 198 Mesa A do 264 How to Work with Bitlocked VOM soii ias 265 HV OWS e loa 265 NAC WV IO PE sata olaaa 267 Tro l shoote oaie dniccca 269 GOSS RR 270 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Introduction Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 Professional is an integrated set of powerful tools that is specially designed to tackle most of the problems you might face while using PC Its functionality covers all aspects of a computer life cycle beginning from carrying out all the necessary partitioning operations to install the system from scratch and providing its data reliable prote
275. nonymous login Allow OpenSSH key based authentication Login RRA Password W Save password Mame Isftp hidrive strato com ren In this section you can manage online backup storages located on FTP or SFTP servers By clicking on available buttons you can create modify delete an FTP SFTP location etc To create an FTP SFTP location you ve got to specify a number of options e Use SFTP connection Mark the option to connect to the desired SFTP server if necessary e Address Type in an address to the desired server e Port Specify the required port 21 for FPT and 22 for SFTP by default e Anonymous login Mark the option to set up anonymous connection Typical username for this type of login is anonymous e Use Active Mode only for FTP Mark the option if your provider requires this type of authentication e Allow Open SSH key based authentication only for SFTP If your provider requires this type of authentication mark the option to specify public and private keys and a passphrase Public key file Browse Private kep file Browse Passphrase e Login Enter a login e Password Enter a password Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location e Name By default the program uses the provided address as the connection name which can be modified however You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the require
276. ntdisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbf Created 2013 Oct 10 Thd 04 49 39 To continue restore process click Next 9 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Basic Hard Disk 3 Mi Model VMware Virtual Size 120 GB N Volume Type File System Size Volume label Active Hidden D Primary NTFS 143 GBE WNewVolume Wo Mo 1 Primary NTFS 8 4 GB New Volume Wo Mo Z Primary Free 97 3 GB No Mo Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 187 1 All contents on disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk3 Your disk before operations o AA Your disk after operations po o 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress Operation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Copied sofar 8 9MB Read so far 14 0 MB 14 0 MB s Write so far 14 0 MB 14 0 MB s Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 06 Time to finish 00 00 00 Restore Disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbt ES Opening archive Img_D3_0300p 000 Restore Primary partition O disk 3 from file mn
277. nto account that applications may still keep writing to disks Actually the backup process consists of two phases the preparation phase snapshot and the data copying phase There are three points of the backup when external commands programs can be launched e Execute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will help you to prepare running applications for taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs to delete unnecessary files suspend services flush transactions or caches etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will run just after taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs e g to resume the previously suspended services etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after finishing the backup process Here you can specify an executable file that will run after the backup process has been accomplished It may include commands programs that will move the backup image to a particular location etc By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot Processing Options By clicking the Browse button you can get into the browser like window to choose an executable file Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 50 Lock in E LocalDisk C ER Y A Date Disk Drives Pb
278. nvironment However we cannot guarantee smooth startup of all found Windows systems but the guest OS for its configuration parameters may be incompatible with the others Paragon Hot Processing Volume Shadow Copy Service Offline versus Online Data Processing In the course of time there have been developed various methods of data processing Despite different work concept all of them can be divided into two principal groups offline cold and online hot data processing techniques As the name infers offline data processing can only be accomplished when the data is in consistent state the operating system and all the applications are completely shut down Actually it is the most preferable way of image creation or Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 31 data cloning since software can obtain an exclusive right to process data that guaranties high level of operating efficiency However the offline data processing is absolutely out of question when dealing with 24 7 production environments In contrast online data processing enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified It is particularly useful for systems with high availability requirements but it won t be accomplished until all active transactions are complete The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a process taking into account that applications may still keep writing
279. o bde command to unlock BitLocker encrypted volume Please use manage nanage bde un lock Drive rk PathloEzternalKeyPi le Ch E nanage bde un lock lt Deive gt HecoveryPassword lt HecoveryPaseword gt Drive gt drive letter Followed by a colon lt PathToExternalKeyPile gt external recovery key File that can be used to unlock the drive RecoveryPassword gt recovery password that can be used to unlock the drive Examples nanage bde unlock C rk E gt RecoveryKey bek unlock G KecoveryPassword 3925347 626 A maA 426 216348 3 uP ia nanage bde 16635 562785 478H056 a Progranms Paragon Softuaresprogran nanage bde unlock es rk a k coyrecoverykey b As you can see on the screenshot above we re attempting to unlock volume E by providing a path to the corresponding recovery key recoverykey bek which is placed on System Reserved volume C O The same dialog can also be called from the main launcher right click of the mouse on the required volume then select Unlock Volume 6 Asaresult the volume should be unlocked Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 269 EN Administrator X windows SYSTEM32 cmd exe cae fe Please use nanage bde command to unlock BitLocker encrypted volume manage bde unlock lt Drive gt rk PathloExternalKeyFile gt Pa is manaye bde unlock Drive gt RecoveryPassword lt RecoveryPassword gt
280. o account the total capacity of all virtual disks inside the virtual machine File name for the virtual disk GA New VMware virtual hard disk A The virtual disk will take about 10 5 GB on PARAGON G The selected volume has only 34 GB of free space and cannot hold the virtual disk file Help me to find an appropriate place forthe disk 8 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Virtualizing system from its backup image P2V Restore Let s assume that your system has been corrupted as a result of a hardware failure You realize it s quite obsolete and it s next to impossible to replace the damaged hardware devices Migration to a new hardware platform seems the best way out if not for one thing you still need access to your software but you do know for sure that the bulk of it won t work on the new platform Luckily you ve got a backup image of your old system made with Paragon software that s just enough for its virtualization Before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got a backup image of your old system e You ve got enough free space to store a virtual image of your old system depends on the system e You ve got one of the supported virtualization software To restore a Windows system from a Paragon s backup directly to a virtual environment please do the following Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 244 1 Click the Copy amp M
281. o available filters To create a filter please click the Add Category button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 56 E Filter Browse Description gt You can use wildcards Y and az file name mask Wildcards in path are not allowed men In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the General Copy and Backup Options File Backup Exclude Options Be Exclude from file backup archives Specity masks for files and folders that must be excluded from archives Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wkd Delete filter _cab Delete filter mel Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter 30 Auxiliary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category bak Delete
282. o copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source Ea MX g images C U ers AdministratorsD esktop images Mame T JU JPET Y OTAN TPT AT I Je Users _ a 2 2 de Administrator 2 2 2 i di App ata 2 2 2 di Application Data oo Je Contacts di Cookies di Desktop El Total data size 15 9 MB 3 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item There are several ways the Wizard can store pour data Please select how would you like to save the data f Save data to physical partitions f Burn the data to CO DVD or BD 4 On the Select Destination Path page specify the exact place to copy the data to Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 202 Please select the destination path where to save the data from clipboard Lookin E Local Disk ic El 2 Address IC Mame SF Local Disk C Ly are_091013125156058 are_091013131559760 Jj arc_091013133756822 J arc_091013140817551 arc 091013140825801 Total data size 15 9 HB Space available on destination 219 6 GB 5 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation Please overview the transfer options ou can return to the corresponding page and chan
283. o know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the restore operation e A backup image to be restored The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show al amp E Ee 1071072013 7 78 58 AM File level Archive 1071072013 2 78 24 AM File level Archive 101023 7 11 42 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey 107 1072013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 1010 2013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 1010 2073 6 55 45 AM File level Archive 1010 2073 6 54 26 AM File level Archive 1010 2073 6 48 07 AM File level Archive 10102013 2148 49 AM New Volume G 10102013 21819 AM New Volume G 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 4 10 9 2013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 107972013 11 17 38 PM Filelevel Archive P UU OOOO Switch to File View Archive File Details Total size OU Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 7 18 58 4M Archive size 119 Bytes Comment No comment is available File C are_10101737417850771 FLOQO000000000000000 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the View
284. o that please select the required filter in the left top corner of the page Browse Tor Archive show at F S B R SECO a Show disks he 1 43 04 PM Mew Volume E Show partitions Show file archives 0 42 21 PM NEW VOLUME F ES 10492013 10 47 54 PM NEw VOLUME 10 9 2013 10 33 47 PM Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware Source Object Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 63 By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window Browse Tor Archive Look in El Local Disk C AX F Local Disk C E arc new 10 9 2013 10 34 00 PM be arc_new pb 264 5 KB 10 9 2013 10 34 00 PM Switch to Archive List View r Archive File Details Mame Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE File Ear new arc new pbt To continue click Next Cancel ie The section below i e Archive File Details displays a short description of the selected image including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by
285. of configuration is certainly not optimal for effective data organization and safety First it negatively affects the system huge amount of data aggravated by its inevitable excessive fragmentation causes poor performance in file search access and read write operations Second it s inconvenient for the user system files and folders piled up with media and documents besides obvious difficulties in transparent organization become a naughty problem in case of a system malfunction Split Partition Wizard can help you detach the operating system and data or different types of data by splitting one partition to two different partitions of the same type and file system you just select a partition then files and folders you d like to move to the new partition finally redistribute free space between the two partitions if necessary and here you are Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 211 Before you start please take into account the cases when the split operation is impossible to perform e Partition s type is not supported you have selected a non standard primary or logical partition e The selected partition is located on a dynamic disk e You ve already got 4 primary partitions on a Basic MBR disk e You ve already got 3 primary partitions on a Hybrid Retained GPT MBR disk e There s not enough free space on the selected partition free up to 50 MB e The selected partition has an unsupported file system
286. off the computer O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Restoring separate files and folders from a backup The program provides a very convenient option to access backup archives and restore only data you need the so called selective restore functionality Restore Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the Restore Wizard 3 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe Browse for Archive page choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Look irr Backup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 im Name F Backup Capsule on Hard Disk O are_091013125156058 E DIFF13025859001 0000000 E DIFF1 3025959447 0000000 are_09101 3125156059 pbt are_09101 3125156058 pfi 2 are_091013125156059 pim are_111013111635639 SG arc 111013111635639 pbf arc 111013111635639 pfi arc 111013111635639_0200p 000 arc 111013111635639_0200p pr arc 111013111635639_0201p 000 Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Local Disk C No comment is available Volume label No label
287. oftware com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded you will see the Universal Application Launcher In general it enables to run components of the product load drivers for undefined hardware or establish a network connection Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 24 Migrate 0S an w Unlock Volume Restat Shutdown 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject The WinPE based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue Basic Concepts This chapter explains terms and ideas that show how the program works To understand these helps to obtain a general notion of the operation performance and makes it easier for the user to operate the program System and Data Protection The data protection issue is a growing cause of worrying for more and more people today Indeed it is hardly to find a person who will be particularly happy when all precious information on the hard disk is irreversible lost as a result of its malfunction
288. on by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of your hard disk Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Resize Partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 89 O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Adjacent partitions to resize Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to redistribute the unused space between as the right one will be selected automatically The wizard will resize space between Local Disk C and data on Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware YVAN ware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Select left partition from a pair of adjacent partitions you would like to resize Aight adjacent partition will be selected automatically Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey A Local Disk 0 El 7 2247 GB NTFS 274 9 GE NTFS e Resulted size of partitions Redistribute the unused space between the partitions with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please specify new sizes of selected partitions Selected part of Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Dis E o data 4 MA 16 5 GE NTFS Lett volume size Right volume size 269898 MB 4 Me F 1750 MB MB Result After the o
289. on disk data isn t the best choice but it s great for personal data like your documents email databases photos etc So let s see how to back up all office documents of the My Documents folder to an SFTP server 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What to back up page select Documents to protect all office documents inside the My Documents folder Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 139 je Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E mail Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats Scated In the My Documents folder N Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 Onthe next page choose FTP Servers as backup storage Look in El Local Disk C a lel gt A E Local Disk C E Local Disk F 5 New Yolune G ib pool server Pr A p 5 pool server 2 be Ep or Physical partitions Fy System Reserved Disk 0 partition 1 Primary NTFS UN Netw
290. on tt Information about drive letters assigned to these partitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected Basic Hard Disk O 500 GB YMware Virtual Type Actwe File System Volume label Size Drive letters Primary Yes System Resel 350 MB lt Mone gt Primary Mo NTFS Mo label 478 GB E Primary Mo Free 21 9 GB lt None gt Properties Edit letters 9 Click the Edit Letters button to correct an existing drive letter or assign a new one in the Windows System Registry Partitions List Letters Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on tt Information about drive letters assigned to these partitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected Basic Hard Disk O Type Active Primary Letters Primary Primary Change Release Properties Edit letters 10 Once you ve assigned the appropriate drive letter close the dialog then click the Apply button 11 Confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 170 A 3 pending operations Apply changes Yes No Details 12 After the operation is completed click the Report button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog E N IMA BE Reporting To view the Operations performed Operation 1
291. onaronnonanonnnnnncnnnnnnccnnonaninnss 214 RESIZING Dartitlons Of ADDIS BOOU Campanas 217 Creating Dual BOGE Systems ali a sae it ls 219 WIndows Vista AVIAOWS X Pcrson a ae a a n S 219 WINAOWS AP WAINGOWS VISA N T 224 System Migration SCENANIOS piratas 226 Migrating Windows OS to a solid state drive Migrate OS to SSD ooocccnnncnnnccnnnnnnnnacnnnnnnnnocnnnnononocnnnnononoronnnonanonnnnnonaninos 226 Migrating system toa new HDD Up 10 2 2 11BilR SIZE uein eas eee cea dc ee 229 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Using 2 2TB HDD as internal data storage in Windows XP cccccccsseccccessececeesececcesececeescceseuseceseuneceeseeeeesseeeeeeugeceesenes 231 Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS ccccccsssssccccceesseececeeeeseeccceeeesecceeseeeseceesseegeesessegnneeess 233 Virtualizing the current SyVstemAP2V CODY lisina a 240 Virtualizing system from its backup image P2V REStOre cccccccccssseccccceeeseccceceesecccsseuesecceseueneecseseeenecessseueneceeesaueneeess 243 Creatine an empty virtual disk Create MD sai 248 Making Windows Vista 7 backup bootable on virtual hardware P2V Adjust OS oocccccnccccccnnncnnnnnnononananancnnnnnnnnnnnncnannnos 248 Connecting a virtual disk Connect VD ccecccccccsessecccccceeecccecceeeecceseuesececeseueseccseseuesecesesuenseccsssaenseceesseuseceessugnseeesteggees 250 Reparto niga MIRLOS rss a pebeta 252 Exchangi
292. ons crucial for a migration of this kind O This feature is only available for the bootable recovery environment Copy Facilities e Migrate OS to SSD to move any Windows OS since XP from a regular hard disk to a fast SSD Solid State Drive even of a smaller capacity thanks to advanced data exclusion capabilities e Partition hard disk copy to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability O Copy functionality can also be used as an alternative way of data protection Virtualization Facilities e Connect VD to connect a virtual disk as if it s an ordinary physical disk thus opening up all functionality available for physical disks to virtual e P2V Copy to migrate a Windows physical system to a virtual environment in the online mode e P2V Restore to migrate a Windows physical system backed up with a Paragon disaster recovery tool to a virtual environment e P2V Adjust to recover the startup ability after unsuccessful virtualization with a 3rd party tool e Create VD to create an empty virtual disk or with specific data of one of the supported virtualization vendors Virtualization is the latest trend in the system migration protection and evaluation Boot Management Facilities e Boot Manager Setup Wizard to easily manage several operating systems on one computer Partition Hard Disk Managem
293. operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available e File system for new partition From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification e Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 83 W Use 0S built in format routine Please select number of sectors per cluster ro Restore defaults e Use OS built in routine Mark the option to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control O Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Available operation scena
294. option at the foot of the page Archive Content Mame Type File system Size Used Local Disk C Primary MTFS irer GB 32GB Archive Details Mame Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 32GB Free space 445 6 GB Change backup settings 5 On the Backup Destination page select where you want to place your backup image There are several ways the Wizard can store pour data Please select how would you like to save the archive f Save data to the Backup Capsule f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name larc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 55GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space O available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 149 8 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary
295. option on to use a disk ID instead of an index in the script e Interaction with the user Mark the option to pause the script interpreter during the execution to prompt the user s confirmation or other input Otherwise the program will not stop using default values for parameters if needed e Commit after each operation Mark the option to commit changes after each operation e Check for errors after each operation Mark the option to insert a special code in script which checks the status of the last executed operation and stops the script processing if there are errors of any kind e Discard all operations on close Mark the option to empty the List of Pending Operations after generating the Script Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 114 Result After the operation is completed you receive a new script file It is placed into the specified destination its features defined in the dialog This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations O To learn more about scripts please consult the Paragon Scripting Language manual Extra Functionality This chapter describes the supplementary functionality available in the program View Partition Hard Disk Properties The program enables to obtain in depth information on the properties of hard disks and partitions Besides the general information such as capacity used space or file system type it provides the poss
296. opyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 121 Gar Defragment volume s MFT The MFT Defragmentation may improve performance of your system For locked volumes this operation will demand to reboot 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Compact MFT The program enables to re write MFT Master File Table in a more compact way to increase the access speed to files on NTFS partitions In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select an NTFS partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Compact MFT There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Pr You are about to compact the Master File Table iM FT an volume Cy Please specify an e parameters W Truncate MFT after compacting e Compact records Mark the option to re write MFT records and shift them to the head of the table e Truncate MFT after compacting Mark the option to remove table rows emptied during the operation 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Test Surface The program enables to test surface of existing partitions and blocks of free space for bad o
297. opyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 247 CA lUsers user Downloads wmscsi 1 2 0 4 fp Browse Windows 7 has been found on the source partition and the disk controller type has been set to SCS BusLogic Please provide a path to an iso or flp image that contains a driver for the selected disk controller O Our program supports injection of drivers delivered in iso or flp images so you can for instance download and inject drivers for the BusLogic controller from the VMware website e Additional properties that depending on the selected virtualization vendor may include Size of the virtual disk By default the wizard offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object s which you can resize however available for all Resize partitions proportionally If you upsize the resulted virtual disk you can make the wizard proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact available for all Create a split disk You can choose whether to automatically cut the resulted virtual image to files of 2 GBs or not available for VMware only Pre allocate all disk space You can choose whether to pre allocate all space of the future virtual disk or do it dynamically not available for VMware ESX and Oracle VirtualBox Please preview the resulting layout of the virtual disk before you proceed Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware virtual image Virtual Image
298. opyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 42 Disk and partitions list z Name File system Yolurme size Partition size Used Free Volume label Hidden Ac 5 Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 500 GB system Reserved NTFS 350 ME 350 MBE 256 8 MB 931MB System Reserved No ME 499 6 GE 11 7 GE 487 3G Mo label G Local Disk C NTFS B Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 vMware YMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev J 495 6 GE 6 Unallocated Back Up Hard Disk 499 9GB No label 5 Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey Burn Hard Disk on CD DVD or BD GS Unallocated H E Bytes 749 9 GB No label No Me 5 Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Unallocated Restore Hard Disk Bytes 119 9GB No label No Ni Update MBR Convert to GPT hard disk TI Undelete Partitions Wipe Hard Disk EditWiew Sectors Properties The Disk and Partitions List provides detailed information on all hard disks and partitions found in the system including the following properties Name Volume label if exists Drive letter File system type Volume size Amount of used and unused free space Active Inactive attribute Hidden Unhidden attribute The Disk and Partitions List is synchronized with the Context sensitive Menu and the Properties Panel Thus by selecting a disk on
299. or A F The operation cannot proceed until you enter all 8 symbols Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 102 12 Are you sure you want to change serial number of volurne Fy our computer may no longer boot or work correctly Please enter new seral number in hexadecimal format FE 44 0513 4404 CED e e 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Hard Disk Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry hard disk operations supported by the program Converting Dynamic MBR to Basic The program allows you to convert a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes into a basic one while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a dynamic MBR disk into basic you should take the following steps 1 Select a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Convert to Basic 3 Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a dynamic disk contains several simple volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition
300. or users and regular applications because its accidental modification usually makes a partition unusable Hard Disk Geometry Traditionally the usable space of a hard disk is logically divided into cylinders cylinders are divided into tracks or heads and tracks are divided into sectors The triad of values Sectors per Track Tracks per Cylinder Amount of Cylinders is usually named the Hard Disk Geometry or C H S geometry Tracks and cylinders are enumerated from 0 while sectors are enumerated from 1 These disk parameters play an essential role in the DOS Partitioning scheme Modern hardware uses an advanced scheme for the linear addressing of sectors which assumes that all on disk sectors are continuously enumerated from 0 To allow backward compatibility with older standards modern hard disks can additionally emulate the C H S geometry Hidden Partition The concept of a hidden partition was introduced in the IBM OS 2 Boot Manager By default an operating system does not mount a hidden partition thus preventing access to its contents A method of hiding a partition consists in changing the partition ID value saved in the Partition Table This is achieved by XOR ing the partition ID with a 0x10 hexadecimal value Master File Table MFT is a relational database that consists of rows of file records and columns of file attributes It contains at least one entry for every file on an NTFS volume including the MFT its
301. ore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image e Mapa network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 180 Specity a YD Container to restore Look in Local Disk C ER Y Remote location mapping A network share El Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection No archive selected Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to It Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary O You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image If you need more information on the selected backup object please click the corresponding link at the bottom of the section Click Next to proceed Specity a YD Container to restore Look tr E Network Storage servere spool 2 Eh gt A Mame Size Date Je inc_1_0 1 1042392073 6 15 03 AM E Je inc_1_03 104292013 8 18 17 AM di iInc_2 12 104292013
302. ork places mj Network FTP Servers Archive name arc_1 01013094249110 5 Click on the Create an FPT Location button to set up parameters for the required SFTP location Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location ftp de e E al Y Name l Size Date Create FTP SPTP location Use SFTP connection Address Jidhive strato com Fort 21 Anonymous login Use Active Mode Login tid Password aa e Save password Name STRATO Hib rive Use SFTP connection Mark the option to connect to the desired SFTP server T Archive details Address Type in its address Port Specify the required port 22 by default Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 140 Anonymous login Mark the option to set up anonymous connection Typical username for this type of login is anonymous Allow Open SSH key based authentication If your SFTP provider requires this type of authentication mark the option to specify public and private keys and a passphrase Public key File Browse Private kep file Browse Passphrase Login Enter a login Password Enter a password Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location Name By default the program uses the provided address as the connection name wh
303. orrector You can find it in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page select the Search for Windows installations to correct option Please choose the operation a Search for Windows installations to correct Correct Master Boot Record MBR Correct partition boot record O Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD O Modiy partition parameters To begin click Next 5 On the next page choose the required Windows installation from the list of found installations if several then select the Edit the Boot ini file option If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status S refers to a system partition you can edit the Bootini file B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry MN Partition Status Root System 1 DiskO ParttionO S 6 WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform Properties Correct drive letters in the System Registry 8 Edit the Boot ini file Correct partition boot record Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 6 Examine the file maybe that s where the problem is If it contains a mistake correct it by using the appropriate buttons Edit the Boot ini file on Hard Dis
304. ower outage or an accidental reset of your computer please do not use this option Reset Standard protection with acceptable performance Maintaining a special journal our program enables to automatically complete a data sensitive operation interrupted by an accidental reset of your computer from our bootable recovery media thus reviving the corrupted partition Power loss Maximum protection but minimal performance Besides journaling our program will also disable cache of your disk when accomplishing data sensitive operations to avoid data loss even in case of a power outage Backup Image Options E Backup Image options W Control archive integrity Choose this option to allow writing of specific data that will later be used during restore to check the archive integrity It can show down the backup operation W Set image file names automatically Choose this option to automatically name files in complex archive Compression level Normal compression Good compression Provides average speed with the reasonable image size Image split Enable image splitting Choose this option to enable splitting the archive to several files Maxinurn split size fi ME This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during backup restore operations Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 46 e Control archive integrity Mark the checkbox to guarantee that all backup images
305. ows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 224 The Following unpartitioned sj up Windows 1 O Installation of Windows XP will make Windows Vista non bootable 12 Launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard As your Windows Vista is non bootable any more you need to install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager O To avoid double installation please use our recovery media to activate Boot Manager 13 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 14 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR Boot menu opbons Normal mode Y Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds it O Hidden mode Time to display the BootManager startup message 15 seconds Choose a hot key for startup Boot Manager Fi Tw 15 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Windows XP Windows Vista As this very situation is very close to the previous one please use the Windows Vista Windows XP scenario
306. pace to add to the system partition You cannot do it directly however but by carrying out a number of extra move resize operations Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Se Local D lL Data E J E Unallo 21 B 244 1 GEN Ml 641GB Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated 499 9 GB Hew Vol 170 2 GE L 5 Since the block of free space is within the extended partition you need to take it out first The program enables to resize the extended partition only when there s a block of free space adjoining its borders In our case it s between two logical disks So we need to move it To do that please select the first logical partition and then call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local D Data E Gl Unallo Hew Yol 21 2 G6 244 L Back Up Partition 5 Burn Partition on CO DWD or BD Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Restore Partition Unallocated 4999 GE Format Partition Delete Partitions Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mae Partition Unallocated gt Defragrnert MFT 749 9 GB Compact MFT Change Volume Label Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 Mware Remove Drive Letter Ml Unallocated Hide Partition 6 At first shift the right edge of the partition to the right then do
307. pecified destination its features defined by the wizard Available operation scenarios e Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule e Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD e Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive e Backing up files to an FTP SFTP server e Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive e Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition e Creating a differential to a full partition backup e Creating a sector increment to a full partition backup e Creating a file increment to a full partition backup e Creating an increment to a full file backup Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 68 e Creating acyclic partition backup e Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials Restoring System and Data The program includes a convenient and reliable restore wizard With its help you can restore all types of backup images created with the program It provides easy to understand instructions to configure and perform all the necessary settings Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter t
308. peration is completed the unused space between the specified partitions will be redistributed according to your needs Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent logical partition e Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Redistribute Free Space Wizard The Redistribute Free Space Wizard helps to increase free space on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions By default the wizard adds to the target partition all existing blocks of the free space Besides you can specify partitions to act as a space donor The wizard will automatically recalculate positions of the partitions and move their contents to new locations Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Redistribute Free Space Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 90 There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation Partition to enlarge Select a partition the size of which will be increased at the expense of other partitions e Blocks of the free space if any will be automatically added to the target partition Choose a volume to expand Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l g o Local Disk C p o Local Disk
309. pick the right one E Lele Ji archive_db 8 7 2013 1 23 35 PM Ji PerfLogs 7 14 2009 6 37 05 AM Program Files 8 7 2013 10 38 32 AM I Python31 11 3 2009 3 32 46 PM Jo Users 11 3 2009 3 01 47 PM J Windows 11 3 2009 3 31 23 PM eH Drive D iI LAA E a Driver Directory Y A device driver has been found Press OK to install this driver Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 239 Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp Primary IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp Intel A 82371AB EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device z 3 gt WHware Accelerated AMD PCNet Adapter Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device ie VMware SCSI Controller gwinn scsi int bos e Manually add a driver for a device that has not been found by our wizard by clicking then specifying the required INF file Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Please select an INF file nettpsmp inf 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM 4 nettsbnt inf 32KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM 34 netupard inf 45KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM 88 netvt 6 inf 4 1KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM 5 netw840 inf 54KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM 5 netw926 inf 21KB 5 15 20
310. ppears It has nearly the same functionality as for the Normal mode except for the Network Configurator and Log Saver commands Besides due to certain limitations of the PTS DOS environment there is no possibility to burn CD DVD discs Low Graphics Safe Mode When the Low Graphics mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has the same functionality and looks similar to the Safe mode but graphically simpler Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 23 Hard Disk Manager 14 You can create delete and 2 Simple Restore Wizard format hard disk partitions Ba File Transfer Wizard using this program which E Boot Corrector will start now AAA Upon the start please W Start the command line select the drive and one of 8 Reboot the computer its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Booting from the WinPE Recovery Media The WinPE recovery environment can be a real alternative to the Linux DOS recovery environment Providing nearly the same level of functionality it offers an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version does Startup To start working with the WinPE recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can O get here www paragon s
311. properties that depending on the selected virtualization vendor may include Size of the virtual disk By default the wizard offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object s which you can resize however available for all Resize partitions proportionally If you upsize the resulted virtual disk you can make the wizard proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact available for all Create a split disk You can choose whether to automatically cut the resulted virtual image to files of 2 GBs or not available for VMware only Pre allocate all disk space You can choose whether to pre allocate all space of the future virtual disk or do it dynamically not available for VMware ESX and Oracle VirtualBox Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 243 Please preview the resulting layout of the virtual disk before you proceed Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware virtual image Virtual Image Local Disk SCSI LSI Logic e E Create a split disk T Pre allocate all disk space Current size is 1409657 MB 17 8GB l l iia 4 Resize partitions proportionally O The maximum limit you can downsize the virtual disk is the capacity of its first partition 7 Specify a file name for the virtual machine and its location By default the wizard scans all your local disks for available free space and picks the most appropriate location taking int
312. r s shaded area it is possible to estimate the used disk space For the selected at the moment object there s the possibility to call a context sensitive popup menu with available operations Disk map a Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l i Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Large sized bars display the following information about physical disks e Type basic or dynamic MBR GPT e Manufacturer e Model Small sized bars display the following information about logical disks and blocks of free space e Volume label if exists e Drive letter e Total size e File system The Disk Map is synchronized with the Context sensitive Menu and the Properties Panel Thus by selecting a disk on the map the two will automatically display detailed information on it To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Disk Properties chapter Since the Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List have the same purpose the user is allowed to extend only one at the moment by using a corresponding arrow button Disk and Partitions List The Disk and Partitions List is another helpful tool that helps to get a clear cut picture on the current state of the system hard disks and partitions All objects disks partitions or blocks of free space on the list are sorted according to their starting position For every item there is the possibility to call a context sensitive popup menu with available operations C
313. r Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions not to keep blocks of free space between partitions on the targeted hard disk Copy data and resize partitions proportionally to make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when upgrading the hard disk to a larger one After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios Migrating system to a new HDD up to 2 2TB in size Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 76 Cloning Partitions You can duplicate partitions to protect oneself from downtime in case of a system malfunction or for cloning sample partitions The program enables to duplicate all partition data including files the exact structure of directories and file system metadata location of files security information access quotas etc The Copy Partition Wizard will help you copy a partition of any file system To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single op
314. r renee aetna 54 Filesystem Conversi n OPON S crasas a pda 54 CODY Backup EXCIIde OPTIONS iS 55 File Backup Exclude ODOM crnan o o do a aa aa lo NE ite 56 FleBackup Include O A bai 57 DetrasmentacoN OPINA E deasiiS 58 LOE FNS eo 9 A o e a 59 FIP Sites OPUS AAA 60 VIEWING Disk Properties a aii 61 VIEWING Image Properties cisco 61 USE Ne Restore WIZarO putero cuba 61 Using the Archive Data Das lios 64 Data Backupiana Rescue arica naaa 65 Creating Backup IMACS ci ai 65 Restorine System and Data lic 68 COPY TASKS ii 73 donne Hara DISKS dios 73 CONDE Rar CONS a o ii dis 76 BO0t Mandaee meiosis Ii 17 PartitioniMan age Men dti i E E E A 78 Basic Partitioning ODA ON Sia ea 79 Advanced Partitioning Operas sn ii aicicas 87 Chanelne Parton MOUS casas tasado tr 99 Hard DiskManagementianini aaa 102 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Converting DynamiGIVIBR to Basie oras 102 CONVENE GPT TOW ASIC MBR nadaa na 103 Convertine Basic MBR 10 GPT iia AN NaN 103 A O E 104 Changing Primary Obs E 104 Wipe VAS KS incita 106 Task Scene CON Cease adas 109 A e 109 Managing Tasks ads odos 110 CREATING a nea ias EE 112 SCFIPUNS mir cauees reaweecc ewe TT 112 Extra Funcionales SA 114 View Partitions Hare DISK Propertie Serora e aa 114 MU Pg tasers as esc sew a ena eee means eae a 115 FH E E ld a o PAC A Oo O RAR E 116 MORO dat ao o eo eet ee 118 MOUNT AI A A o ai e 119 Defragment ME Erencan iaa 120 COMPANIE T aar id AA
315. r unstable sectors If found any it automatically marks them unusable in the file system metadata thus minimizing the risk of data loss In order to start the surface test you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition or a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Test Surface Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 122 O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 From the pull down list choose the level of the surface check Gar Test surface of volume C A Testing volume surface allows to find bad blocks and other problems Please select a surface test level Pe mye lt p 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check File System Integrity The program allows you to check integrity of a file system It can be used to detect possible file system errors before performing any operation on a partition To start the system integrity check you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Check File System Integrity There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Pr Check volume C No label NTFS
316. ragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 27 Please note that the current version of the product has a number of limitations regarding sector based increments e Increments can only be created for full archives of the new type with a pfi index file Any of our flagship products since Hard Disk Manager 12 supports this functionality e Increments can only be created for full archives stored on a local mounted drive or a network share e Increments cannot be created for archives of entire GPT disks e Increments can only be restored under Windows if no restart is needed or WinPE e Increments cannot be processed with the Synthetic Backup Wizard e Increments cannot be processed with the Check Archive Integrity Wizard e Increments cannot be processed with the Create File Complement Wizard e Increments cannot be browsed in Volume Explorer e Increments can only be used with our software e Increments cannot be compressed e Increments cannot be encrypted e Increments cannot be splitted Full and Incremental File Backups A full file based archive only contains files and folders It is really efficient when backing up an e mail database or particular documents as no redundant data is processed But if you care about maintaining a files history you can benefit from one more supplementary technique called Incremental File Backup An incremental archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full or incremental file
317. ram enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition Pr Convert the basic GPT hard disk to a basic MBR hard disk If there are more than four volumes on the disk only the first three may become primary and the rest logical The hard disk after convert Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Hew Volume H 115 8 GE NTFS The resulted hard disk should have at least 1 primary partition s Please select how many primary partitions you need hora te The program can only process dynamic GPT disks containing solid simple volumes without extension Converting Basic MBR to GPT The program allows you to easily convert a basic MBR disk into a basic GPT disk while keeping its contents intact The operation is quite safe for the on disk data but you should know that only 64 bit Windows OSes since Vista are able to boot from this type of disks So if you ve got a 32 bit Windows OS accommodated on a disk you d like to convert to GPT it won t start up after the operation is over In order to convert a basic MBR disk to a basic GPT you should take the following steps 1 Select a basic MBR hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Hard Disk gt Convert to GPT hard disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All righ
318. ration and restart the machine as required but it just boots back into Windows without accomplishing the operation Please run chkdsk f for the partition in question cannot create a new partition on the disk There can be a number of reasons for that e The program cannot create a new partition on a dynamic disk e The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free space on an existing partition to a new partition cannot copy a partition There can be a number of reasons for that The source or target disk you select is a dynamic disk 4 primary partitions or three primary partitions and an extended one already exist on the target disk need to copy a partition But when selecting a place where to make a copy always get a crossed circle sign no matter which partition is selected The program enables to copy a partition only to a block of un partitioned space If you don t have a block of free space on your hard disk please delete or reduce an existing partition to accomplish the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 270 6 cannot do anything with my USB flash drive get a crossed circle sign when trying to select any area on it Some USB flash drives don t have the MBR Master Boot Record that s the cause of your problem To fix the issue please use the Update MBR function of our program or fixmbr of the W
319. re GmbH All rights reserved 246 e CPU number If your computer supports multiprocessing select how many CPUs you d like to allocate for the virtual machine e Memory amount Depending on the guest OS the wizard calculates the recommended size of RAM which can be modified however MJ P2V Restore Wizard e ne setting Virtual Machine Properties Page Virtual machine version VMware Workstation 6 5 oe Virtual machine name Windows Y CPU number 2 oe Memory amount 1024 MB Minimum memory size Recommended memory size J Maximum memory size f taken more you could face extensive swapping Note The selected virtual machine version does not officially support the quest OS so we cannot guarantee its startup Please select another version of the virtual machine If the selected version does not officially support the guest OS you will be notified and prompted to select another one 7 Set properties of the resulted virtual disk s e Virtual disk interface By default the wizard sets the most appropriate interface for each disk Anyway you ve got the option to change it to one of the supported by your guest OS Just click on a disk and then select the required interface from the pull down list But be ready to provide drivers for it on the next page Virtual disk info Interface Virtual disk Dis a copy of the disk 0 199GB SCSI LS Logic lx IDE SCS BusLogic SCSI LSI Logic SCSI LSI Logic SAS C
320. re Virtual SCSI Disk Dew d 40 e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Result 75 Choose copy options that suit best your task Copy options HOD raw copy Partitions raw copy Ferom incremental copy Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkbos to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager for destination hard drive Copy options HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is ove
321. reate a new partition in Unallocated 119 9 GB area Please select size position and file system of the new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i E o New Volume H i E 114 7 GB NTFS Create new partition as Please specify new partition size 1175464 OMB 122 879 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition Faas OMB 122 870 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition a732 lt OMB 122 870 MB Please select file system for new partition NTFS Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specify drive letter H z o More options e Define whether the partition will be Primary Extended or Logical You can choose the desired partition type from the pull down list As a matter of fact the available alternatives fundamentally depend on the selected block of free space within the Logical free space only Logical partitions can be created Within the Primary free space both Primary partitions or the Extended Partition can be created e Partition Size Define the size in Mb of the new partition e Free space before Define the position in Mb of the new partition relative to the beginning of the block of free space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the new partition Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required
322. reate the partition and then automatically boots the system again The O If a partition to resize is locked and cannot be processed the wizard makes the system rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows You can also choose whether the future partition will be primary or logical by marking the appropriate checkbox e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set a number of additional parameters Tour hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Volume label New Volume Assign the following drive letter E Partition type From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 82 Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 3 Tou are about to c
323. rent size is 3 9 GB Min Volume Size O Bytes _ 1 Max Volume Size 7 9 GB In case the second option has been marked the wizard enables to choose an existing primary partition to install a new operating system On this page vou can choose an existing primary partition where you Would like to install a new operating system Please make sure your BIOS 12 set up to boot from the disk containing the selected partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Local Disk BB 253 4 GB NTFS b Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware iTotal size 353 4 GB Used 108 7 ME E o Hew Yol A o Local lf ee 153 3 GB 7 o Hew Yo 2 GB NTFS 46GB NTF 2 6 GB NTFS SI Disk Dev 1 Your computer may fail if any other OS has already been installed on the selected partition e Partition properties Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 95 W Yes want to format the partition Partition type NTFS Assign the following drive letter Surface test level More Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only file systems that can be correctly placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition Surface test level Define the level of the surface check
324. ressteresetressteesrtressrereseeresereeeseerene 15 supported virtual machines tor PZV Scenarios aaa 15 Supported File SYSTEMS ines aii ae ar aras 16 Supported MEd citi sn atc tii A E TAA 16 GERNE o o 16 System Requirements imac 16 Ac e o o A A 17 nn Eo Ane 18 Building Recovery Medola atacaba 19 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media oocooccooccoocnnccnnccnaconocnnccnaronacnnconaronarnnconaronaronccnaronaronccnarona 19 e E e O E su nesaauace dav euereaseeseean wyesieuneei 19 PA o cack eee ucwatmamoacnanenusunsneunpoecnarnsnnreanseetsanonsaumeronenens 20 Booting from the WinPE Recovery Meia cscccsccccscecsccscscsccccscnceccccecscsccccecscsceccecscsceccecscsceseececsceseececces 23 o o dices bras E A E E bisa no o 23 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Basic COMCC DUS iia AS 24 Systemana Data Protection cintia 24 File Backup Versus ectonbackU Disraeli lonas nn 24 IU a e e O 25 BICIS dica 27 PUTATIVE RO SEO late lss 28 System WIFE AIIZALION vic cdectntciseccsrcaaveiees sanccteanacacurcagenavascaecnevelannaiessedavenesaceutenensenueriavacevesnseicnncsaetteiaaceaweonteats 30 Paragon Hot Processing Volume Shadow Copy Service csccscsccccscscsccccccscnccccccscsccccccscsceccccecsceseececsces 30 Offline Versus Online Data PROCESSING ias 30 Paragon HOt Processing TecnnolO ar AAA a a 31 volume Shado Ww GOV SSI 16S A 31 OV FID SUD DOM cieren cis teisivcaherewsivecdawecweccadcun as 32 Dyna
325. rios e Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Formatting Partitions Any partition should contain some file system to be used for keeping data The process of installing a file system is commonly known as formatting A huge variety of file systems have been developed these days Supported File Systems The program provides the ability to format partitions of the following file systems FAT12 amp FAT16 FAT32 HFS NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 Linux Swap v 2 Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Format Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 84 Dialog Startup 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Format Partition O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to format Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to format On this page you can choose a volume pon would like to format Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l g o Local Disk C
326. rt please take into account the following issues You should have a full backup of the new type with a pfi index file Any of our flagship products since Hard Disk Manager 12 supports this functionality Increments can only be created for full archives stored on a local mounted drive or a network share Increments will be stored together with the corresponding full archive Increments cannot be created for archives of entire GPT disks Increments can only be restored under Windows if no restart is needed or WinPE Increments can only be used with our software Increment cannot be encrypted compressed or splitted Increments cannot be browsed in Volume Explorer O To know more on the subject please consult the Basic Concepts section Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 153 To update an image of the selected partition please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Incremental Backup 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Please note that only sector based images of the new type with a pfi index file are available to work with Show partitions amp ER Ek 1092013 7 08 28 AM NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 6 MB cal 1
327. rved 160 O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected file archive It is placed into the same destination as the base image O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a cyclic partition backup To automate the partition backup process please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Cyclic Backup 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What to back up page select a partition you want to make a cyclic backup of Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition pon want to back up Mame Type File system Size J e CN My Computer My Computer E Basic MBR Hard Disk O VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 fae SiMaster Boot Record MER O Buttes BEST Primary NTFS 350 MB 2 te Y BL ocal Disk C Primary NTFS 280 3G6B E Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 fae master Boot Record MER O Butes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 499 6 GB e ENE VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 750 G
328. rver 2003 because for these systems O Though all Windows systems have built in driver repositories please be prepared to have they are very modest Technology Application Let s consider a number of situations when the Adaptive Restore technology can help you out e If you need to migrate to a different hardware platform with minimal effort e If you need to upgrade hardware while keeping all programs and settings intact e If you need to replace failed hardware and cannot find an exact match for original system specifications Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 30 Known Issues 1 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to different hardware you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC 2 If you ve installed several operating systems on one partition we can only add drivers to the latest version of OS Microsoft highly recommends that you install an operating system on a separate partition 3 Please note drivers are not cached during selection That s why if you select a driver to add to the system but it s already unavailable during the operation the program will end the operation with an error System Virtualization With new powerful x86 computers system virtualization has become extremely popular It s a so
329. s Bootable Curent values Registry volume letter C Partition ID 1 6 Confirm the operation 7 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 8 Restart the computer Correcting BCD Boot Configuration Data To automatically correct Windows BCD please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can O get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 2 167 up to boot from CD USB first Launch Boot Corrector 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select Correct boot parameters to let the wizard fix BCD in all found Windows installations Ee We the list of all windows installations amd comerct boot A Corect the Master Boot Record MBR View the list of all Hard Disks and corect MBR executable code on some of them x Edit View Sectors View edit backup and restore sectors or a group of sectors on the hard disk or partition of your choice E Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD Automatically corect boot ini and BCD on all hard disks in system Fix EF boot entry or switch EFI boot entry to another GPT bootable hard drive with Windows OS installed 5 Confirm the operation 6 Click the Finish butto
330. s algorithm e Paragon s algorithm e Custom algorithm To know more on the subject please consult the Data Security Standards section Supported Technologies Along with using innovative technologies from outside Paragon has developed a number of its own original technologies that make its products unique and attractive for customers e Paragon Hot Backup technology to back up locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements e Paragon Hot Copy technology to copy locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements e Paragon Adaptive Restore technology to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P e Paragon Power Shield technology to provide data consistency in case of a hardware malfunction power outages or an operating system failure Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 15 Paragon UFSD technology to browse partitions of any file system including hidden and unmounted modify and copy files and folders etc Paragon Hot Resize technology to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work Paragon Restore with Shrink technology to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size ta
331. s completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 12 Turn off the computer ate This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition The system fails to boot since some files are damaged If you have a backup of the system partition you can recopy these files to make the system be operable again 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 197 option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux
332. s if necessary If the total amount of free space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it If the partition is locked and cannot be resized the wizard makes the system reboot to create the backup capsule and automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows 6 Start the operation by clicking the Next button or return to correct the settings After the operation is completed you can place backup archives into the created backup capsule O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image into the backup capsule please do the following 1 Create the backup capsule with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 130 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions AA Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or
333. s method is slower but more space saving than the first one Please note however that if an increment has been done after defragmentation plenty of redundant data might fall into it as during the defragmentation process data is being moved but not changed Compare changed data It s a combination of the mentioned above methods After detection of new changed files there will be created a list of clusters to copy During the copying clusters on source and backup volumes will be compared in order to copy only changed clusters and clusters of new files as well as clusters of changed file system metadata not all metadata This method is the slowest of all three but it can guarantee increments will only contain changed new data 6 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later Back up now Back up the specified objects to a virtual disk container after completing the wizard Generate script Create a script to back up the specited objects later 7 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes After the operation is completed you receive an incremental update to the selected pVHD backup image placed next to the base image O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a sector increment to a full partition backup Before you sta
334. s to unlock a volume encrypted by BitLocker For more information please consult documentation provided by Microsoft 3 Enter an unlock password Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 267 BitLocker F Enter password to unlock this drive More options 4 Asaresult the volume should be unlocked 4 Devices and drives 5 Sm fY Local Disk C A Floppy Disk Drive A O 9 49 GB free of 19 5 GB 5d System Reserved E ge OVD RW Drive D 27 TO yw MA 90 5 MB free of 349 MB EY DATA F ES 19 4 GB free of 19 5 GB j If going to the main launcher of our program right now Open Advanced Interface the volume will be correctly detected and become available for operation Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev System Reserved E Local Disk C 350 MB NTFS 19 6 GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev ij DATA F Unallocated 19 5GB NTFS 40 4GB The same action can also be accomplished through the manage bde command line tool For more information please consult the next scenario In WinPE 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media O To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Go to the Security and BitLocker Encryption section then select List of Volumes 3 Define volumes encrypted by B
335. sary 5 Click the Network identification tab to change a network name of your computer generated automatically and a workgroup name AA Needs SE Netware identficeton ENS Computer Name MININT DGKUSAW Workgroup WORKGROUP Primary DNS suffix 6 By default the wizard saves all network settings in the netconf ini file located on the WinPE RAM drive thus it will only be available until you restart the computer However you can just once configure your network device and then save this file to some other destination for instance a local drive and this way avoid constant re configuration just by providing a path to it So Click Save to file to save the netconfig ini file to the required destination Network troubleshooter Network Configurator includes a traceroute ping utility that enables to get detailed information on particular routes and measure transit delays of packets across an Internet Protocol IP network So with its help you can easily track down problematic nodes 1 If you need to ping some network host please select Ping then type in the required IP address or its name Click Start when ready Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 263 deg Network utilities Ltility Ping Target www google com ls Ping the specified host until stopped Resolve addresses to hostnames Clear output Number of echo requests to send Start Running ping www google co
336. sconnect the virtual disk or close our program Exchanging data between physical and virtual environments Let s assume you need to import a lot of data from one of your virtual disks The best way out is to use our program as it can help you do that without starting up the virtual environment and the other actions typical for this task To import data from a virtual environment please do the following 1 Connect the required virtual disk to our program ma Click Tool Button then select File Transfer Wizard 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select a disk where the required data is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the window You can find it among physical partitions as a connected virtual disk cannot have an assigned drive letter either Source Ty System Reserved Disk 1 partitic EN Disk Drives E Local Disk C BD ROM Drive D 5 DVD Drive E DVD RW Drive F PY PARAGON G Physical partitions EN Network places O To easily find the required disk please use its volume label or sequence number as a check point Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 256 5 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Click Next to continue Clipboard wizardspartitioningadvanced png Amg _wizardspantitiori _ 200 ok png Ama 00 ok png 201 delet
337. sessions to install and run the program In both cases the program functionality will be limited 7 Onthe Ready to Install the Program page click Install to start the installation or Back to return to any of the previous pages and modify the installation settings 8 The Final page reports the end of the setup process Click Finish to complete the wizard First Start To start Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 under Windows please click the Windows Start button and then select Programs gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager The program provides wide opportunities in the field of hard disk structure modification so 1 just to be on the safe side please make a backup of your data before carrying out any operation The first component that will be displayed is called the Express Launcher Thanks to a well thought out categorization and hint system it provides quick and easy access to wizards and utilities that we consider worth using on a regular basis With its help you can also start up the traditional launcher the help system or go to the program s home page Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 19 7 Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 Professional Paragon Hard Disk Manager Professional User Manual HARD DISK MANAGER 14 e a SWITCH TO FULL SCALE LAUNCHER Migrate OS Create Format Partition al PZY Copy P2 Adjust Tr
338. settings are unavailable for this type of backup 5 Edit the default description to the created incremental image if necessary Specify the required method of acquiring information on changed data Incremental Image Properties Comment Increment 1 Diff compare method Compare metadata Compare metadata Compare all data Compare changed data e Compare metadata default At first file system metadata on each source and backup volume will be analyzed As a result there will be built pairs of directory trees If having to do with NTFS directory trees will be built directly on MFT skipping the file system analysis Next action will be comparison of file attributes e g creation modification date inside directory trees of the source and backup volumes to Copy all file clusters with changed attributes Copy all file clusters with changed location of cluster chains Copy all clusters of new files Copy all sectors with metadata for instance all copies of directories and MFT for NTFS Depending ona file system and its occupation a full metadata copy can take up to several hundreds of megabytes This method is the fastest of all three but increments will also be the largest Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 152 Compare all data At first there will be created a list of all occupied cluster chains After comparison with the backup contents all changed clusters will be copied Thi
339. start the computer to initiate the installation process If you ve changed your mind on installing a new operating system don t insert its distributive CD but press ESC when the following message appears Insert distributive CD DVD and press any key to continue or Esc to abort the action Please make sure your BIOS is set up to boot from CD DVD All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 8 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues You need a bootable distributive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination Windows AP Professional Setup The Following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list Io set up Windows AP on the selected item press ENTIER To create a partition in the unpartitioned space press C To delete the selected partition press D 238591 AB Disk at Id on bus 8 on atapi HBR
340. subject Pr Are you sure you want to change primary slots order Tou are about to change primary slots order on Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware irtual S SCS Disk Dev Your computer may no longer boot corectly Slot No Object type File System Volume label Primary FAT 32 NEW VOLUME O 1 Primary New Yolunne 2 Primary Linus Ext NEW VOLUME 3 Primary Linus Swap No label e Mame New Yolume F Volume label New Volume Total size 3 6 GB File system MTFS Used space 38 8 MB Free space 3 6 GB Start sector 5640192 End sector 13273087 e e 3 Inthe opened dialog you can see the current enumeration of the primary partitions of the selected hard disk in the Partition Table To help you distinguish partitions from one another the program provides the following parameters for every partition Slot Volume Partition type File system Partition size Volume label There are two buttons on the right to move the selected partition up and down within the primary part of the Partition Table 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 106 Wipe Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to wipe a hard disk partition of any file system or only destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data thus providing high level of security
341. t back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Cyclic backup to automate the backup of separate partitions It is an ideal option if you want to establish a self acting data protection system This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program Synthetic backup to change any property merge a given differential image with its full image split un split compress de compress etc of an existing backup image without carrying out a physical backup operation For pVHD images Backup to VD Wizard to protect separate partitions or entire hard disks Incremental Backup to VD Wizard to create incremental backup chains based on the base pVHD image Restore Facilities Restore an entire disk separate partitions or only files you need from the previously created backup image for PBF and pVHD Restore with Shrink to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 12 e Adaptive Restore to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other acti
342. t of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp be Be J 10710 2013 6 46 07 AM File level Archive r1 3 ME 4 5 ME do z 1 5 10710 2013 2 17 49 AM New Volume G 14 2 GE 3KE 3 MHo co 1 5 10710 2013 2 1719 AM New Yolume G 14 2 GE 22 7 ME 1 5 10322013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GE 26 7 GB D 1 J 10797 2013 17 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes 1 J 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 49KB kr 3 1 J 10797 2013 11 1518 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB mi 1 J 10797 2013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes 1 E 10322075 7 08 28 4M NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 8 ME a 1 E 104322075 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 30 8 KE 1 5 1032073 6 38 00 AM New Volume E 10 5 GB 47 MB 1 5 1032073 6 16 134M Local Disk C 477 7 GB 9 2 GE 1 5 10320035 55257 AM Local Disk C 4335 GB 5 1 GE E 1 Switch to File View Archive File Details Total sze 71 9 MB 75 470 033 Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 6 48 07 4M Archive size 4 8 MB 5 134 266 Bytes Comment No comment is available File LC farc_09701 37406825801 archive phi Base archive E arc 0910137 40825801 arc 09701 3140825801 pbt To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch
343. t will only be available for the current Windows session Specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Enter network credentials Enter your credentials to connect to server2 quest Domain WeSs0WENTOIENM _ Remember my credentials ES Access is denied Cancel e Click OK when ready Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 138 6 Edit the default archive name and description in the Archive details section if necessary Click Next to proceed Image details Backup name Backup_HDDO_201 231029 073 Backup description Backup image 0121029 0773 7 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later What would you like to do Generate script Create a script to back up the specified objects later 8 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up files to an FTP SFTP server With our program you can protect the entire system separate partitions or particular files by backing up directly to online storages located on FTP or SFTP servers Please note however that due to certain limitations of the network bandwidth the use of FTP SFTP locations for storing many GBs of data OS together with all
344. tart up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Seta new ID for the selected partition s Are you sure you Want to change system ID of the 2 partition F Current system ID is 0x07 NTFS ExXFAT ReFS Changing system IO might prevent some operating systems from working with the partition 0x07 NTFS ExFAT ReFS f Please enter 1D manually De e e Predefined ID Select from the pull down list the required ID e Enter ID manually With the spinner control set the required ID value It has to be a 1 2 digit hexadecimal number 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Serial Number of a Partition FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS file systems include the Serial Number parameter A partition s serial number is saved in the boot sector Its value is generated while formatting The program enables to modify the serial number parameter for FAT16 FAT32 or NTFS partitions without re formatting In order to change a serial number you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Serial Number Q There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Enter a new serial number for the selected partition It should contain 8 hexadecimal figures 0 9
345. tdisk sdb2 img_D3_0300p 000 Data writing Opening archive Img_D3_0301p 000 Restore Primary partition 1 disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0301p 000 Data writing Close 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Restoring a file increment Let s assume that you re busy with developing some project and you make file increments of it on a day to day basis not to lose valuable information So you ve got a file backup chain One day you understand that the job of the last three days is a complete and utter failure Don t give up recover your project to the state when everything s ok To restore a file increment please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 188 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all S E Ek 1071072013 6 55 45 AM File level Archive 24 EB 309 Bytes 7 10 10 2013 6 54 26 AM File level Archive 71 9 ME 1071072013 6 48 07 AM File level Archive 71 9 MB 10102013 217 494Mm New Volu
346. tem from backup capsule thus in case of having a third side boot manager it will be removed To avoid that you can 1 Creation of the bootable backup capsule on an MBR disk will result in overwriting MBR save the current MBR with the help of the Edit View Sectors tool Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 129 The backup capsule can only be bootable if it is located on the bootable device 5 Preview the resulted hard disk layout and change size of the backup capsule if necessary by moving the corresponding slider or manually entering the required value It will be created at the expense of free space of the selected disk Tour hard disk before creation of backup capsule Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev j i Local Disk C 4994 GB NTFS Tour hard disk after creation of backup capsule Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VHware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l p o Local Disk C a Backup Capsule 255 3 GE NTFS 2438 GE Backup capsule curent size is 244 1 GB Min capsule size 340 MB OR AR 25001 3 MB Max capsule size 488 3 GB There is no restriction on the size of the backup capsule merely depending on the available space of the hard disk and the capacity needed for the backup If the wizard cannot find enough free space in one block it will redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partition
347. ter recovery tool which enables to create backup images of Windows OS in a vhd Virtual Hard Disk format used now by Microsoft Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 249 Virtual PC Server Hyper V and Oracle VirtualBox Unfortunately you cannot just take this type of backup to run Windows OS in a virtual environment it won t start up We can help you out with this naughty problem Our P2V Adjust OS Wizard can patch Windows OS inside a vhd backup image according to the specified virtualization vendor to let you start up and work with your Windows on virtual hardware To make a Windows vhd backup image start up in a virtual environment please do the following 1 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select P2V Adjust O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Browse for the required vhd backup image of your Windows Look in E Local Disk C je g Date l archive_db 8 6 2013 11 35 01 PM di My virtual disks 87 2013 2 19 48 AM gt y my_vista vhd 8 7 2013 2 35 26 AM WB vdisk0 vhd 8 7 2013 2 35 30 AM E Je vista vmdk 8 7 2013 2 07 39 AM _ VMware virtual hard disk vmdk 6 KB 8 6 2013 11 11 07 PM 4 Perflogs 7 13 2009 7 37 05 PM fl y Program Files 8 6 2013 10 56 56 PM m ji Users 1 28 2011 12 02 29 PM E Windows 9
348. th a 3 party tool e g it s a parent VMware disk which snapshot is being used by a virtual machine will be opened for reading only with the corresponding notification e A double disk connection is prohibited Repartitioning a virtual disk Let s assume you ve got several partitions on a virtual disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates the system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make the system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following 1 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 2 Select it on the disk map Disk map de Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive ATA Devi Unallocated Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev System Reserve Local Disk T 100 MB NTFS 499 9 GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev New Volume 39 5GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Unallocated 39 9 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 4 VMDK image Virtual Image 100 MB NTFS 499 9 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 4 VMDK image Virtual Image 3 Right click on the space donor partition then select Move Resize Partition Copyright 1994 2013 P
349. the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk O Your disk before operations MA O Your disk after operations i X 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Operation progress Copied so far 376 4 MB Read so far 430 0 MB 86 0 MB s To copy 10 2GB Write so far 430 0 MB 47 8 MB s Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 12 Time to finish 00 06 28 Restore Primary partition O disk 1 from file larc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pbf Data writing 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a network drive Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on a remote backup server That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a network drive please do the following Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 176 For PBF images 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Buil
350. the partition To do that please call a context menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button and launch the Move Resize dialog Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 07 You se about to oesie a new partition in Unallocated 341 2 GB ares Please select size postion and file system of the new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev ij New Volume F 341 2 GB NTFS Create new partition as Primary partition se Please specify new partition sine 149451 7 MB 349 451 MB Please soecty size of free space before the partition 0 al OMB 349 437 MB Please specfy size of free space after the partion U DME 349 443 MB Please select fle system for new partition NTFS Pigs enter new volume label Mew Volume Please specty dive letter F Ei doi 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the left by the drag and drop technique While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 222 Are you sure you want to move resize volume E You are about to move resiza NTFS volume No label E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev il 9 Unallocated 231 6GB 9 Local Disk E 268 3 GB NTFS 0 514M8 f 10
351. tically During the operation all contents of the right partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition By default the program offers an easy to understand folder name which can be customized however Please note that itis possible to select only FAT FAT S2 of NTFS adjacent partitions or FAT FATS of NTFS partitions separated from each other by free block You will not be able to proceed further if no pair of partitions of these types are presented on the disk Select left partition from a pair you would like to merge Aight partition will be selected automatically Please note that content of right partition will be placed within a folder placed in a root of left partition ou can specify this folder name in a field below Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E o System g o Data E k t Utils G 2 1 GB NTFS 266GB NTFS 32 GE NTFS Specity a folder name to keep content of right partition Folder Hame Imerged_partition_content To review the changes click Next 1 If a system partition is the right one of the selected pair Windows OS will become unbootable after the merge operation is over Result After the operation is completed the disk space of the two adjacent partitions will be consolidated Redistributing Unused Space between Partitions Express Resize Partitions Wizard The Express Resize Partitions Wizard enables to easily increase free space on one partiti
352. time through Boot Corrector O The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing partition O To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Boot Management Our program enables to easily manage several operating systems on one computer with the help of the Boot Manager Setup Wizard Among the key features of the wizard the following should be mentioned e Upto 16 operating systems on one PC e Secure adding removing of the Boot Manager startup record to from the MBR e Auto Boot option to automatically start up the previously chosen OS after a certain time period Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 78 e Hiding of any primary partition except selected at the moment Startup e Click Tool Button then select Setup Boot Manager There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Boot menu options In this section you can switch between the following modes Normal mode Choose this mode to display the boot menu every time the computer starts up and define a timeout on the expiry of which the program will
353. ting system Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Install New OS Wizard O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to install a new operating system The program offers two ways of installing a new OS e to create a new primary partition for it or use an existing one Where would vou like to install an operating system A new partition will be created by using unallocated space of your hard disk or unused space of existing partitions tis the most preferable way as no system or users data will be affected during the installation process f want to use an existing primary partition to install OS ln case creation of a new primary partition i not possible there are already four primary partitions on the disk or not desirable you are free to select any of existing primary partitions Please note that all data on the selected partition will be deleted if you choose to format it later in this wizard Besides make sure no operating system has already been installed on that partition O Only primary partitions can be used to install an operating system In case the first option has been marked the wizard enables to specify A hard disk if several where a new partition will be created Thanks to an advanced program
354. tion Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup e Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Partition O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy partition operation e The partition to copy Select a partition you want to copy On this page you can choose a volume to copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der ae Local Disk 0 499 56 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der i o Local Disk E go Local Dis l f 177 Unallocat 171 8 GB FAT S2 154 6 GE NTFS 162 GB e Destination disk Select a hard disk with enough unallocated space to perform the operation The wizard will create a copy of Local Disk F from Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev Estimated size of this volume after selected files and folders will be excluded from copy operation 23 3 GB 275 124 715 616 Bytes The copy mill be created on Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 Mware VA ware irtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Please select where to create a copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der if o Unallocated 119 9 GB O Th
355. tion or exclude a logical partition from the extended partition without partition duplication In order to change a partition type you should take the following steps 1 Select a primary or logical partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Make Partition Logical Primary O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 99 12 Are you sure you want to make the partition logical You are about to make the partition C No label NTFS logical The Make Primary gt Logical option is only available when the selected partition is adjacent O to the extended partition and vice versa The Make Primary gt Logical option of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating system 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Partition Attributes This chapter explains how you can change partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Volume Label etc Mark Partition Active Inactive The program enables to set an active inactive flag for primary partitions of a hard disk By default an operating system will boot only if its partition is active or bootable In order to mark a partition active inactive you should take the following steps 1 Select a prim
356. to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 191 Look in E Local Disk C ER Y Mame Size Date errores O arc_091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM are_09101 3133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM arc_091013140817551 10 9 2073 11 08 51 PM are_09101314082580 10 10 2013 6 48 04 4M G DIFF130258864840000000 10 10 2013 6 48 04 AM FLOOOOOOO00000000000 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM el archive pfi 49MB 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM Ge archive pfp 23KB 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM e Jtask_file pft 40 Bytes 10 10 2013 6 48 04 AM Jarc_091013140825801 pbf 1 8 MB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM Jarc_091013140825801 pfi 576KB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM la are_091013140825801 pfm 15KB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM are_10101305321 8496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM i Ei Se ee eee a a ee ee ee a T N Gwitch to Archive List View Archive File Details Total sze 71 9 MB 75 470 033 Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 6 48 07 4M Archive size 4 8 MB 5 134 266 Bytes Comment No comment is available File C farc_09101731 40825601 DIFF130258864840000000 archive pi Baze archive E arc 091013140825501 arc 09101 3140825801 pbt O To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe How to Restore File
357. to access the mail server When you re ready with the settings click on the Send test e mail button to check if everything is OK e Send e mail notification on apply Specify an e mail to send notifications on the carried out operations Send mail in HTML format Activate the option to create messages in the HTML format instead of plain text Send complete report after applying operations Activate the option to create an in depth report on the carried out operations and send it after performing the last operation Send graphical view of the disk sub system before and after apply Activate the option to allow the program to attach two pictures of the disk layout made before and after the operation is completed By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Operation Dependency Options Operation Dependency Options a Operation dependency options Please select a task to be carried out when one or more of the following operations are committed Perform the task Send e mail notification Operation Ww Adjust OS to boot on new hardware W Adjust OS to boot on virtual hardware ta Backup partition or disk ta Backup partitions or disks increment to virtual containers ta Backup partitions or disks to virtual containers W Boot record correction M Check file system Compact MFT Convert Dynamic Disk to Basic ta Copy partition ta Copy partition by files to zip archive Select all Clear all
358. to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e OS Label Enter a label for the selected partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels will be displayed in the Boot Managers startup menu to help you boot the required operating system OS label Windows 7 Result As the final step the wizard will offer you to insert a distributive CD DVD of the new operating system and restart the computer to launch the installation procedure The program will update your MBR so most likely you won t be able to start up any of the previously installed operating systems Please launch the Boot Manager Setup Wizard after the installation has been completed to fix this issue Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Moving Resizing Partition The Move Resize Partition function allows you to resize or change location of any partition without destroying its data In order to move resize a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Move Resize Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Define parameters of the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 96 Gar Are yo
359. to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What to back up page first take a look at the ready made backup templates If none of the options meets you needs just our case then select Other Files and Folders to create a file based backup of certain data Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E mail Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder PEELE ELE LEE Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 On the What folders and files to back up page you can see a list of all partitions both mounted and unmounted available in the system Mark a checkbox opposite a file folder or even a whole partition to build up contents of the future backup image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 144 Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up Name Size Date 2 H ac 091013140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 57 PM are_101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM f
360. ts reserved 104 Fra Are you sure you d like to convert Basic MER Hard Disk 0 La eh aha WMware VMware Virtual S SCs Disk Dev ta GPT Please Note Despite the fact that all on disk contents remain intact during the operation Your 05 may no longer boot correct for Windows lt P 32 bit for instance does not support GPT disks 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation The program can only convert basic MBR disks Updating MBR The program enables to overwrite the current bootable code in the MBR Master Boot Record by the standard bootstrap code This can help to repair a corrupted bootable code of a hard disk resulted from a boot virus attack or a malfunction of boot management software In order to update MBR of a hard disk you should take the following steps 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call a context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Update MBR O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Are you sure you want to Update master boot record Current MBA contents for hard disk number O will be lost after thi operation our computer may no longer boot correctly 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Primary Slot Different operating systems apply different approaches to enumeration of the primary partitions In
361. tton Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 134 3 Onthe What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions AS 3 Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up pour photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 Onthe next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Mame Type File sstem Size Le Ef My Computer My Computer v E Basic MBR Hard Disk O VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes Master Boot Record MBA O Bytes Local Disk Primary NTFS 350MB 2 te Local Disk C Primary NTFS 280 3G6B E Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes fae master Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 499 6 GB
362. u sure you want to move resize system volume Cj Tou are about to moveresize NTFS volume No label C Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E o Local Disk C 224 7 GB NTFS Volume size 230 114MB 19 261 MB 230 114 MB Free space before 0 Bytes a O bytes 270 852 MB Free space after 0 Bytes a O bytes 270 852 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but will require more time Volume size Define size in Mb of the modified partition e Free space before Define the partition position in Mb relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space Sector to sector move Mark the checkbox to move the partition in the sector by sector mode to process its unused space as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available O When resizing a FAT16 partition beyond the 2GB limit maximum file system size
363. u ve copied the virtual disk added info on it to the BCD boot menu then tried to start up the OS but to no avail your Windows goes BSOD with the 0x000007B error code We can help you out with this naughty problem To make a vhd image of Windows 7 start up on different hardware please do the following Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 258 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE media 2 Connect the required virtual disk to our program 3 Complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Hard Disk Utilization To irreversibly destroy all on disk information without any possibility to recover and that way providing the maximum level of security please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Wipe Disk or Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a hard disk the data of which you want to wipe out Please choose an object for wiping It can be a whole hard disk a single partition or a block of unallocated space you can set to wipe all data on the partition or only unoccupied space on it see the next step Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l E Local Disk C A data 2 224 7 GE NTFS 2743 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Der
364. ugh to easily roll it back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 183 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore O There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp BB 1010 2013 18 58 AM File level Archive 100102013 2 78 24 AM File level Archive 101023 7 11 42 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey 1010 23 7 08 11 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 1010 2013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 1010 2073 6 55 45 AM File level Archive 1010 2073 6 54 26 AM File level Archive 1010 2073 6 48 07 AM File level Archive 1071072013 21 49 AM New Volume G 10102013 21719 AM New Volume G 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 10 9 2013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 1092013111738 PM File level Archive F E p p p F E E E p E Switch to File view Archive File Details Mame Local Disk C Comment No comment is available
365. up Mame Type File system Size A CN My Computer My Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GB Po First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 g master Boot Record MEA O Bytes BEST Primary NTFS 350MB 2 e I Local Disk C Primary NTFS 280 36B 4 g 5 Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB E First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 E SiMaster Boot Record MBA O Bytes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 499 6 GB e ENE VOLUME Primary Linux Ext 350MB Po Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive 50 GB f PB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes E Master Boot Record MER O Butes ll The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate O checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 5 Onthe Backup Destination page select the Burn the data to CD or DVD option There are several ways the Wizard can store pour data Please select how would pon like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to localnetwork drives f Save data to physical partitions C Save data to FTP locations e Burn the data to CO OVD or B
366. up_image_20131015_ 1639 1 Properties Panel that displays properties of the selected image 2 Volume Explorer that enables to access the selected image as a regular folder to explorer its contents or to retrieve certain files 3 Archive List that displays a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Besides the program provides all the necessary functionality to manage backup images in the database add delete mount refresh etc O All panels offer a synchronized layout and are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the user to customize the screen layout Data Backup and Rescue In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to establish a reliable data protection system Creating Backup Images Depending on a type of information you need to protect and the way this information should be processed the program offers a number of handy backup wizards To make your job with the program as easy and convenient as possible all backup wizards share similar work algorithm By going through steps of the wizard you configure all the necessary settings to launch the backup operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Copyright 1994 2013 Para
367. ve File Details Mame Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE File Er farc ne pei To continue click Next Cancel To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 62 e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created In addition there are some special graphical flags to indicate crucial properties FLAG FUNCTIONALITY Disk archive Partition archive File archive rai MBR archive System archive Encrypted archive Compressed archive Complex archive Filtered archive Differential archive Incremental archive do File increment to a partition archive To easily manage images in the Archive Database the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY S Refresh the contents of the database Show only existing archives Add the selected archive to the database Delete the selected archive from the database Besides you may filter backup archives to decide whether to show only file partition or hard disk archives To d
368. versions W Hardware information Choose this option to put information about hardware used in your computer in report This section includes information about processors disk drives network and USB adapters etc Ww Bad blocks information Choose this option to put information about found bad blocks This includes total bad blocks count and a bad sectors list Supervisor 4pproval Please choose this option if wipe reports require mandatory formal approval from an executive or supervisor IF enabled ever wipe report will contain a signature held for a person responsible for duly data sanibization procedures in your compary Font size to use when printing report Middle fonts 12 pts In this section you can specify contents and properties of generated wipe reports e System information Mark the option to include a computer name BIOS version and the used operating system e Hardware Information Mark the option to include information on the used processor disk drivers network and USB adapters etc e Bad blocks information Mark the option to include information on the found bad blocks e Supervisor Approval Mark the option to add a signature field for an executive or supervisor responsible for data sanitization procedures in your company e Font size Select the most suitable font size from the list 12 pts by default Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 52 Partitioning Options
369. very hard disk and every partition has a 32 bit serial number represented by an 8 figure hexadecimal value It is stored in the MBR and its value is assigned when the MBR sector is initialized by Microsoft standard disk managing tools such as Windows Disk Administrator and the FDISK utility In fact a hard disk s serial number is not important for most operating systems and software It is known that Windows NT 2000 and XP store its value in the database of assigned drive letters A partition s serial number is stored in its boot sector in FAT16 FAT32 and NFTS file systems Its value is assigned when the partition is formatted It does not play an important role for most operating systems and software as well Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
370. virtual hard drives Microsoft Virtual PC 2007 Microsoft Windows Virtual PC Oracle Virtual Box 1 0 4 x VMware Player VMware Workstation VMware Fusion 1 Snapshot disks of Oracle VirtualBox are not supported Supported virtual hard drive types VMware Virtual Machine Disk Format VMDK Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk VHD Oracle Virtual Desktop Image VDI Paragon s backups PBF pVHD Supported virtual machines for P2V scenarios Microsoft Virtual PC Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 16 e VMware Workstation e VMware Fusion e Oracle VirtualBox 4 0 Supported File Systems e Full read write access to FAT16 FAT32 partitions e Full read write access to NTFS Basic Disks under Windows Linux and PTS DOS Compressed NTFS files are also supported e Full read write access to Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS partitions e Limited read write access to Apple HFS partitions Unfortunately support of non Roman characters for the HFS file system is unavailable at the moment The company is about to implement it in the nearest future Supported Media e Support of both MBR and GPT hard disks 2 2TB disks included e IDE SCSI and SATA hard disks e SSD Solid State Drive e AFD Advanced Format Drive e Non 512B sector size drives e CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R double layer and also Blu ray discs e FireWire i e IEEE1394 USB 1 0 USB 2 0 USB 3 0 hard disks e
371. west partitioning scheme with minimal effort e File Transfer Wizard to make such operations as transferring of files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible Providing access to Paragon backups as regular folders it may also help to replace corrupted data from a previously created image in case of an operating system failure Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 14 e Volume Explorer is a handy tool when you have different file systems on the disk whether they contain an operating system or just data Volume Explorer will let you explore a file system of any type and provide access to the necessary files and directories regardless of their security attributes e Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection on a bootable recovery media either to save a backup of a partition hard disk or just several files on a network computer or retrieve a previously made backup from a network computer for recovery purposes e Boot Corrector to fix most of the system boot problems that can be a result of a human factor program error or a boot virus activity DO Boot Corrector is only available for the bootable recovery environment Supported Data Erasure Algorithms e US DoD 5220 22 M e US Navy standards NAVSO P 5239 26 e British HMG Infosec Standard No 5 e German VSItR Standard e Australian ASCI 33 e Russian GOST R 50739 95 e Peter Gutmann s algorithm e Bruce Schneier
372. wizard can expand this volume up to 499 6 GB at the expence of other volumes 4 Select a volume to take the space from i e the logical one Select volumes to take space from Free space from that volume will be used to enlarge the volume pou have selected on the previous page Z Free Type Capacity Used pace Free space NTFS Friman 60 3 GB 60 6 GE 219 6 GB FAT Se 101 9 GE O Bytes 101 9 GE Yolume File system 100 Logical 5 On the next page of the wizard you can specify size of the resulted system volume Drag the slider or type in the exact value to set the volume size Your disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Disk C New Volume 6 241 8 GE NTFS M 258368 TES Select new size 264 553 MB 222357 ME 449 061 54 MB E Curent volume size 258 3 GB The volume size has been increased on 41 1 GB 6 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar Separating OS from media data Let s assume you ve got one partition available on the hard disk like other people who purchase a computer with a preinstalled operating system So besides OS it holds all your documents favorite music movies and family photos This type
373. word protect your backup Protect archive with password Please enter a password Password E Contin password NU 11 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process O This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a differential to a full partition backup To update an image of the selected partition please do the following 1 Click the Backup Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Differential Backup 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 147 e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp E Ee 5 1092013 11 23 07 Pe Local Disk E ari GB 26 7 GB J 107 972013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB 309 Bytes J 107 972013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KB 4 9 KB J 107 972013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB J 10 9201 3 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB 305 E 4 Switch to File view Archive File Details Mame Local Disk C Comment No comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 32GB Free space 445 6 GB F
374. would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Defragmentation Options z Defragmentation options Defragmentation mode Safe mode recommended r Slow but reliable In this mode the program requires free space on the defragmented at the moment partition to guarantee protection of pour data in case of a power outage hardware malfunction or a spetem Failure In this section you may set the preferable defragmentation mode e Fast mode Partitions will be defragmented rather fast a 10 30 gain depending on the fragmentation level but a power outage hardware malfunction or a system failure during the operation might lead to the data loss e Safe mode To guarantee protection of your data during the operation the program will allocate some free space not less than the on disk largest file on the defragmented at the moment partition to make a duplicate of every processed file Thus we strongly recommend you to use this very mode Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 59 Log Files Options bs Log files options Logs directory E Browse Please select a folder name to place an engine log files stubact log etc White logs
375. y viewing the provided information about the archive Partition preview NTFS Archive details A Type Image of the partition Archive path farc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pbf Created 2013 Oct 9 Wed 12 52 57 File system NTFS Drive letter E Wolume label Size capacity 500 GB 536 501 813 248 Bytes Used space 10 5 GB 2 Free space 489 GB 98 Sectors Cluster a Dia ibn CIA faa 1 8 On the next page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB o OO Basic Hard Disk O Model VMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Wolume label Active Hidden o gt Primary 350 MB System Resen Yes Na 1 Primary NTFS 280 GB No label Mo Mo 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 9 Onthe Partition Start and Size page you can change size of the partition and its location if necessary Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 175 Partition preview NTFS New size 10263 511649 MB la F 511649 MB Free space before 0 501386 MB Free space after 0 501386 MB 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after
376. you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in Log files In order to send log files to the Paragon Support Team you should take the following steps 1 Click Tool Button then select Send Log Files 2 Provide a customer name and a product serial number 3 Give a detailed description on the encountered problem Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 126 Send log files Please enter short description of your problem and send log files to support Customer Mame J ohn Smith Serial Number O9fde 654ec a49fc 7daf8 237a2 Content of inquiry Help Send Cancel By clicking the Send button the built in mail client will generate a template request with attached compressed log files and then send it to the Paragon Support Team Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents O The Send Log Files function is only available when outgoing mail server SMTP and the user e mail address are properly set To learn more about it please consult the Settings Overview chapter View Logs With a handy dialog you can study logs on any operation carried by the program To make this job as easy as possible all the i
377. ystem partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 216 Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB E NTFS Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CD DVD BD Restore Partition Basic Hard Disk 1 Vv NTFS New Volu Copy Partition Copy Partition by Files Format Partition Delete Partition Basic Hard Disk 2 Convert File 43 Unmount Wipe Partition Basic Hard Disk 0 e 500 GB Clear Free Space l i E l N Volume Type Free volume label Active Hidden n i z Basic Hard DiskO S Modify oO Prima 93 1 MBE System Resen No Mo 1 E Primar Check File System Integrity 3 219GB No label No No 2 Prima Dump File System 212 GB BC Yes Yes Test Surface Edit View Sectors Fa Ctrl F4 Alt Enter Browse Partition Properties 6 Inthe opened dialog set a new size for the partition by moving the slider or by entering the exact value in the appropriate field While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green Click OK to continue Partition preview E NTFS New size 62815 287034 MB J 1168463 E MB
378. zard sf Paracon Paracon SOFTWARE GROUP Data Sanitization Report Customer Information Person User Company Report Information Report Date 1014213 1 28 04 Ak Version Paragon HOM Internal version 10 17 0787 77 08 10 13 System Information Save report Print report The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog To make sure that all on disk data is irreversibly destroyed call the Disk Viewer dialog by clicking the appropriate tab and see it for yourself Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 109 Oz0000 0 0010 Oz0020 Oz0030 0 0040 O D0050 O D0060 O 0070 Oz0080 0 0090 O D0A0 O DO0B0 O DOcO Oz00D0 Ox00E0 Oz00FO Oz0100 Oz0110 Oz0120 Nard An Please select sector number First a Previous gt Hest E gt Last bo tee ORL ERI 2 MA oo H poe mH PAO col Hgg a ER w O The Summary page will be available only when the Virtual operations are disabled Available operation scenarios e Hard Disk Utilization Task Scheduling Automation of operations can really help you out when you ve got to accomplish certain routine operations on a regular basis as it enables to execute them without your involvement while optimizing your computer s work load Setting a Timetable Thanks to the embedded Scheduler you can set a timetable for execut
379. zation With the new backup technology Paragon has also achieved easy support of any virtual containers VMDK VHD etc In the current version the pVHD support has a promotional goal In future releases pVHD will gradually take the primary role e Support of Windows BitLocker to back up restore or copy volumes encrypted by this security feature e Copy Restore to dissimilar sector size Previously not allowed now you can for instance copy or restore contents of a 512 byte hard disk to a 4k hard disk with no additional actions from your side e New UIM Universal Image Mounter Apart from PBF images Universal Image Mounter enables to mount assign a drive letter to pvHD backup images full and incremental to browse their contents and retrieve data both in the program and directly under Windows OS e GPT uEFI compatible Backup Capsule Paragon s bootable backup capsule is compatible with 64 bit Windows systems resided on GPT volumes If having to do with this type of configuration by selecting one additional Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 9 option in the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard you can build a WinPE based bootable backup capsule to successfully start up PC from it in case of emergency To accomplish this action you will need to provide a path to an ISO image of the WinPE recovery environment which can be prepared either with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder
380. ze after excludes Mark this option to save time needed for migration with excludes operation if target hard disk iz larger than amount of used space in partitions on source disk Disks of smaller size Will not be used as a possible destinations To choose the destination hard disk click Next Use exclude masks By default the program doesn t take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog If you need to use them please mark the checkbox and see existing specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard Don t estimate size after excludes You can save time by suppressing calculation of the resulted amount of data to copy after using excludes Please note however if you use this option drives that smaller in size than the source disk will be unavailable to use as destination e The target hard disk Select a hard disk if several where all data of the source disk will be copied to Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content will be deleted Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l Local Disk 0 499 6 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Fp Backup Capsule id New Volume H a 312 7 GB NTFS 437 2 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der dh Unallocated 119 9 GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMwa
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
6V-LVDT/RVDT-1 la brochure «Laissez-vous conter le pays du Val d`Argent 平成18年12月号(PDF:1.83MB Synergy™ Personal Peptide Synthesizer HP NN109AA loudspeaker Directed Electronics A1200/4 Stereo Amplifier User Manual ASUSTOR USER GUIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTION USER MANUAL Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file